WO2021179305A1 - Uplink transmission method and apparatus - Google Patents

Uplink transmission method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021179305A1
WO2021179305A1 PCT/CN2020/079291 CN2020079291W WO2021179305A1 WO 2021179305 A1 WO2021179305 A1 WO 2021179305A1 CN 2020079291 W CN2020079291 W CN 2020079291W WO 2021179305 A1 WO2021179305 A1 WO 2021179305A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
uplink
reference signal
transmission mode
uplink transmission
terminal
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/079291
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
管鹏
颜矛
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/079291 priority Critical patent/WO2021179305A1/en
Priority to CN202080098082.1A priority patent/CN115211175B/en
Publication of WO2021179305A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021179305A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/30Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data
    • H04W36/302Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by measured or perceived connection quality data due to low signal strength

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and device for uplink transmission.
  • analog beams are directional.
  • the main lobe direction and beam width (for example, 3dB) can be used to describe an analog beam pattern.
  • the narrower the beam width the greater the antenna gain.
  • Network devices and terminals can send and receive in specific directions. Take the following communication as an example. The network device sends in a specific direction, and the terminal receives in a specific direction. Normal communication can only be realized when the sending and receiving directions are aligned. In order to achieve beam alignment (that is, alignment of the transmit beam at the transmitting end and the receive beam at the receiving end), beam training is required.
  • 3rd generation partnership project 3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP
  • new radio, NR new radio version (release, R) 15
  • the network equipment needs to configure the terminal's uplink transmission through signaling Beam. If the uplink transmission beam of the terminal changes, the network device needs a lot of signaling for reconfiguration, resulting in a large signaling overhead. At the same time, the frequent use of high-level signaling also brings greater time delay.
  • the uplink transmission beam can directly refer to the downlink beam.
  • the network equipment only needs to send downlink beam switching signaling, and the terminal can automatically follow the downlink beam switching and update its own uplink transmission beam and uplink transmission power, without the need for the network equipment to specifically send signals. Command to notify the switching of the uplink transmission beam.
  • a basic premise of the above-mentioned R16 scheme is that the terminal has beam consistency.
  • the beam consistency of the terminal is not necessarily established. Therefore, in the case that the terminal does not support beam consistency, or in the case of supporting beam consistency but temporary beam inconsistency, how the terminal performs uplink transmission needs to be solved urgently.
  • the present application provides a method and device for uplink transmission, which can help realize uplink transmission when the beams of the terminal are inconsistent, avoiding long delay or interruption of uplink transmission caused by re-beam training, thereby improving Communication efficiency.
  • a method for uplink transmission includes: acquiring an uplink beam corresponding to a first reference signal; and sending instruction information to the network device, where the instruction information is used to indicate the Uplink beam.
  • the terminal obtains the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and informs the network device through the instruction information.
  • the backup uplink beam can be found in advance, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal, avoiding the re-uplink beam training to find the uplink beam, thereby helping to improve the uplink beam performance. Communication efficiency.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is a preset uplink beam.
  • the terminal can notify the network device of the preset uplink beam, and in the case of an MPE problem with the terminal, the preset uplink beam can be used for uplink transmission, so that the network device can accurately receive the uplink signal. That is, a fault-tolerant mechanism is added, which helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: receiving a plurality of reference signals; wherein the obtaining the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal includes: determining the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the plurality of reference signals .
  • the terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals. In this way, the terminal can select a reference signal (ie, the first reference signal) from the multiple reference signals, and notify the network device of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the indication information, so that the network device can further accurately receive Uplink signal, which helps to further improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • a reference signal ie, the first reference signal
  • the sending instruction information to the network device includes: sending a first measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the first measurement report includes the instruction information.
  • the terminal can inform the terminal of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping the network device to accurately receive the uplink signal and improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: sending a second measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the second measurement report is used to indicate that the second reference signal of the multiple reference signals corresponds to The downlink beam.
  • the terminal can inform the terminal of the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping to improve the communication quality of the downlink communication.
  • the first measurement report and the second measurement report are the same measurement report.
  • the indication information can be carried in the second measurement report, thereby saving signaling overhead for transmitting indication information.
  • the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used for To indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be indicated by the first reference signal information Yes
  • the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal may be indicated by the second reference signal information
  • the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  • Indicating the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the signal identifier or the resource identifier can reduce resource overhead compared to notifying the network device through the identifier of the uplink transmission beam and the uplink reception beam.
  • the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams , Or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal can be low-correlation beams, or beams formed by different antenna panels, which helps to minimize the interference of uplink and downlink transmissions, thereby ensuring Helps improve the transmission efficiency of uplink and downlink.
  • the method before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode
  • the transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  • the network device may send instruction information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode. That is, after receiving the indication information, the measurement report sent to the network device by the terminal may be used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Therefore, the network device can flexibly control whether the terminal uses the first uplink transmission mode for uplink transmission, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the method before receiving the instruction information sent from the network device, the method further includes: sending first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink Transmission mode; and/or sending second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset The reference signal corresponds to the same transmission mode of the uplink beam.
  • the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal when the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is not appropriate, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal to find a suitable uplink beam. Helps improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the current uplink transmission mode that is, the second uplink transmission mode
  • the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected or the terminal rotation is detected, and the uplink signaling is detected.
  • the command includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • the terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal.
  • the uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: sending third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or the fourth request information is sent to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears, which helps to further improve the transmission efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to a reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
  • the terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
  • the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of sounding reference signal SRS. .
  • the first uplink transmission mode may be set for all uplink signals, or may be set for different uplink signals, thereby further improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: using an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device.
  • the terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: determining the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal; and performing uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
  • the terminal may first determine the path loss of the first reference signal, and determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and then perform the communication with the network device based on the uplink transmission power and the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Uplink communication, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the uplink transmission, and improving the transmission quality of the uplink transmission.
  • an uplink transmission method includes: receiving indication information from a terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate an uplink beam corresponding to a first reference signal.
  • the network device receives the uplink beam corresponding to the indicated first reference signal, and uses the uplink beam as a backup uplink beam of the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not meet the beam consistency, the uplink signal can be sent through the backup beam. Correspondingly, the network device can accurately receive the uplink signal according to the indication information, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is a preset uplink beam.
  • the terminal can notify the network equipment of the preset uplink beam, and in the case of an MPE problem with the terminal, the preset uplink beam can be used for uplink transmission, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal of the terminal. That is, a fault-tolerant mechanism is added, which helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: sending multiple reference signals, and the first reference signal is one of the multiple reference signals.
  • the terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals. In this way, the terminal can select a reference signal (ie, the first reference signal) from the multiple reference signals, and notify the network device of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the indication information, so that the network device can further accurately receive Uplink signal, which helps to further improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • a reference signal ie, the first reference signal
  • the receiving the indication information from the terminal includes: receiving a first measurement report from the terminal, the first measurement report includes the indication information, and the first measurement report is obtained by measuring the multiple reference signals. of.
  • the terminal can inform the terminal of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping the network device to accurately receive the uplink signal and improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: receiving a second measurement report from the terminal, the second measurement report is obtained by measuring the plurality of reference signals, and the second measurement report is used to indicate the plurality of reference signals The downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal in the reference signal.
  • the terminal can inform the terminal of the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping to improve the communication quality of the downlink communication.
  • the first measurement report and the second measurement report are the same measurement report.
  • the indication information can be carried in the second measurement report, thereby saving signaling overhead for transmitting indication information.
  • the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used for To indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be indicated by the first reference signal information Yes
  • the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal may be indicated by the second reference signal information
  • the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used for To indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  • the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  • Indicating the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the signal identifier or the resource identifier can reduce resource overhead compared to notifying the network device through the identifier of the uplink transmission beam and the uplink reception beam.
  • the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams , Or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal can be low-correlation beams, or beams formed by different antenna panels, which helps to minimize the interference of uplink and downlink transmissions, thereby ensuring Helps improve the transmission efficiency of uplink and downlink.
  • the method before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode
  • the transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  • the network device may send instruction information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode. That is, after receiving the indication information, the measurement report sent to the network device by the terminal may be used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Therefore, the network device can flexibly control whether the terminal uses the first uplink transmission mode for uplink transmission, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the method before receiving the instruction information sent from the network device, the method further includes: sending first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink Transmission mode; and/or sending second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset The reference signal corresponds to the same transmission mode of the uplink beam.
  • the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal when the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is inappropriate, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal find a suitable uplink beam, thereby improving Uplink transmission efficiency.
  • the current uplink transmission mode that is, the second uplink transmission mode
  • the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected or the terminal rotation is detected, and the uplink signaling is detected.
  • the command includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • the uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: sending third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or the fourth request information is sent to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears, which helps to further improve the transmission efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to a reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
  • the terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
  • the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of sounding reference signal SRS. .
  • the first uplink transmission mode may be set for all uplink signals, or may be set for different uplink signals, thereby further improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: using an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device.
  • the terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: determining the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal; and performing uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
  • the terminal may first determine the path loss of the first reference signal, and determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and then perform the communication with the network device based on the uplink transmission power and the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Uplink communication.
  • a method for uplink transmission includes: determining second request information, where the second request information is used to request to exit a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; sending the second request information to the network device.
  • the terminal can send the second request information to the network device, and can request the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal to flexibly find the uplink beam, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending the second request information to the network device when obstruction is detected or the rotation of the terminal is detected.
  • the terminal When the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is not suitable, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal find a suitable uplink beam, thereby helping Improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the current uplink transmission mode that is, the second uplink transmission mode
  • the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected or the rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling is detected.
  • the command includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • the terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal.
  • the uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: sending first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
  • the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: sending third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or the fourth request information is sent to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal In the case where the terminal detects that the MPE problem disappears, it can send the third request message to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears, which helps to further improve the transmission efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method before sending the second request information to the network device, the method further includes: sending capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode It is a different transmission mode of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  • the terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
  • a method for uplink transmission includes: receiving second request information from a terminal, where the second request information is used to request to exit a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is The uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  • the network device receives the second request information sent by the terminal, and the second request information can request the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal to flexibly find the uplink beam, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the receiving the second request information from the terminal includes: receiving uplink signaling from the terminal, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected, or the rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling Including the second request information, the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • the terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal.
  • the uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes: receiving first request information from the terminal, where the first request information is used to request to enter a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
  • the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: receiving third request information from the terminal, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or receiving fourth request information from the terminal, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the method further includes: receiving capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and a preset Different transmission modes of the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
  • the terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
  • a device for uplink transmission may be a terminal or a chip in the terminal.
  • the device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned first aspect or third aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the device includes a transceiver module.
  • the device may also include a processing module.
  • the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module.
  • the transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the transceiver module may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna.
  • the processing module may be a processor.
  • the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be, for example, a memory. When a storage module is included, the storage module is used to store instructions.
  • the processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute the instructions stored in the storage module or from other instructions, so that the device executes the above-mentioned first aspect or third aspect, and various possible implementation modes of communication method.
  • the device can be a terminal.
  • the chip when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module.
  • the device may further include a processing module, and the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module.
  • the transceiver module may be an input/output interface, pin or circuit on the chip, for example.
  • the processing module may be a processor, for example.
  • the processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal executes the first aspect or the third aspect, and any possible implementation communication method.
  • the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the storage module can also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory) memory, RAM) etc.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • the processor mentioned in any of the above can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more for controlling the above All aspects of communication method program execution integrated circuit.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • a device for uplink transmission may be a network device or a chip in the network device.
  • the device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned second aspect or fourth aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the device includes a transceiver module.
  • the device may further include a processing module, and the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module.
  • the transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the transceiver module may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna.
  • the processing module may be a processor.
  • the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be a memory, for example.
  • the storage module is used to store instructions.
  • the processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute instructions stored in the storage module or instructions derived from other sources, so that the device executes the above-mentioned second aspect or fourth aspect, or any one of the methods thereof.
  • the chip when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module.
  • the device may further include a processing module, and the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module.
  • the transceiver module may be an input/output interface, pin or circuit on the chip, for example.
  • the processing module may be a processor, for example. The processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the network device executes the second aspect or the fourth aspect, and any possible implementation communication method.
  • the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like.
  • the storage module may also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
  • the processor mentioned in any of the above may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits used to control the execution of the programs of the above-mentioned various aspects of the communication method.
  • a computer storage medium is provided, and program code is stored in the computer storage medium, and the program code is used to instruct instructions to execute the method in the first aspect or the third aspect, and any possible implementation manners thereof .
  • a computer storage medium is provided, and program code is stored in the computer storage medium, and the program code is used to instruct instructions to execute the method in the second aspect or the fourth aspect, and any possible implementation manners thereof .
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method in the first aspect or the third aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • a computer program product containing instructions which when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method in the second aspect or the fourth aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
  • a communication system in an eleventh aspect, includes the device described in the fifth aspect and the device described in the sixth aspect.
  • the terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals, thereby selecting a beam corresponding to a reference signal (ie, the second reference signal) from the multiple reference signals as Downlink beam.
  • the terminal may also indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals in the measurement report.
  • the terminal can find two beams to report to the network device, one for downlink transmission and one for uplink transmission. In this way, when the terminal does not meet the beam consistency, the backup uplink beam can be found in advance, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal, avoiding the uplink beam training to find the uplink beam again, thereby improving the communication efficiency of the uplink beam .
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system of the present application
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of an uplink transmission method in a traditional scheme
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD LTE Time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • the terminal in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal device, wireless communication device, user agent, or User device.
  • the terminal can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), and a wireless communication function Handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminals in the future 5G network or terminals in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
  • the network equipment in the embodiments of the present application may be equipment used to communicate with terminals.
  • the network equipment may be a global system for mobile communications (GSM) system or code division multiple access (CDMA).
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • the base transceiver station (BTS) can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved base station (evoled NodeB) in an LTE system.
  • NodeB base station
  • WCDMA wideband code division multiple access
  • evoled NodeB evolved base station
  • ENB or eNodeB it can also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and the future 5G
  • a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), etc. are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
  • the CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB.
  • the CU is responsible for handling non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer functions.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing the physical layer protocol and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer, and the physical (PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
  • the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory).
  • the operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating systems, Unix operating systems, Android operating systems, iOS operating systems, or windows operating systems.
  • the application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software.
  • the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application can be provided in accordance with the embodiments of the application.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal or network device that can call and execute the program.
  • various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques.
  • article of manufacture used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium.
  • computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
  • various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
  • machine-readable medium may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system of the present application.
  • the communication system in FIG. 1 may include at least one terminal (for example, the terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, the terminal 50, and the terminal 60) and a network device 70.
  • the network device 70 is used to provide communication services for the terminal and access the core network.
  • the terminal can access the network by searching for synchronization signals, broadcast signals, etc. sent by the network device 70, so as to communicate with the network.
  • the terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, and the terminal 60 in FIG. 1 can perform uplink and downlink transmissions with the network device 70.
  • the network device 70 may send downlink signals to the terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, and the terminal 60, and may also receive the uplink signal sent by the terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, and the terminal 60.
  • the terminal 40, the terminal 50, and the terminal 60 can also be regarded as a communication system, and the terminal 60 can send downlink signals to the terminal 40 and the terminal 50, and can also receive uplink signals sent by the terminal 40 and the terminal 50.
  • embodiments of the present application may be applied to a communication system including one or more network devices, and may also be applied to a communication system including one or more terminals, which is not limited in the present application.
  • a network device can send data or control signaling to one or more terminals. Multiple network devices can also send data or control signaling to one or more terminals at the same time.
  • the embodiment of the beam in the NR protocol can be a spatial domain filter, or a spatial filter or a spatial parameter.
  • the beam used to transmit a signal can be called a transmission beam (Tx beam), can be called a spatial domain transmission filter or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial transmission parameter);
  • the beam used to receive a signal can be called To receive the beam (reception beam, Rx beam), it can be called a spatial domain receive filter or a spatial receive parameter (spatial RX parameter).
  • the transmitting beam may refer to the distribution of signal strength in different directions in space after a signal is transmitted through the antenna
  • the receiving beam may refer to the signal strength distribution of the wireless signal received from the antenna in different directions in space.
  • the beam may be a wide beam, or a narrow beam, or other types of beams.
  • the beam forming technology may be beamforming technology or other technologies.
  • the beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology, etc.
  • Beams generally correspond to resources. For example, when performing beam measurement, network equipment uses different resources to measure different beams, and the terminal feeds back the measured resource quality, and the network equipment knows the quality of the corresponding beam. During data transmission, the beam information is also indicated by its corresponding resource. For example, the network device instructs the terminal's physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) beam information through the transmission configuration indication (TCI) resource in the downlink control information (DCI).
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • TCI transmission configuration indication
  • multiple beams having the same or similar communication characteristics are regarded as one beam.
  • One or more antenna ports can be included in one beam, which are used to transmit data channels, control channels, and sounding signals.
  • One or more antenna ports forming a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set.
  • each beam of the network device corresponds to a resource, so the resource index can be used to uniquely identify the beam corresponding to the resource.
  • the resource index can be used to uniquely identify the beam corresponding to the resource.
  • the resource can be an uplink signal resource or a downlink signal resource.
  • Uplink signals include but are not limited to sounding reference signal (SRS) and demodulation reference signal (DMRS).
  • Downlink signals include but are not limited to: channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), cell specific reference signal (CS-RS), UE specific reference signal (user equipment specific reference signal, US-RS), demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS), and synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronization system/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block).
  • the SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a synchronization signal block (synchronization signal block, SSB) for short.
  • a resource is a data structure, including its corresponding uplink/downlink signal related parameters, such as the type of uplink/downlink signal, the resource element that carries the uplink/downlink signal, the transmission time and period of the uplink/downlink signal , The number of ports used to send uplink/downlink signals, etc.
  • Each uplink/downlink signal resource has a unique index to identify the downlink signal resource. It is understandable that the index of the resource may also be referred to as the identifier of the resource, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • CA Carrier aggregation
  • CA can aggregate two or more component carriers (CC) to achieve a larger transmission bandwidth and effectively increase the uplink and downlink transmission rates.
  • CA can support in-band continuous carrier aggregation, in-band discontinuous carrier aggregation, or inter-band discontinuous carrier aggregation.
  • the component carrier may also be referred to as a carrier component (CC).
  • beam consistency means that the terminal can find the uplink transmission beam according to the downlink reception beam, or find the downlink reception beam according to the uplink transmission beam.
  • the terminal may use the beam for receiving the downlink signal as the uplink transmission beam for uplink transmission.
  • the manner in which the terminal finds the uplink transmission beam according to the downlink reception beam may be referred to as the "default uplink transmission mode".
  • the terminal can use specific absorption rate (SAR) measurement to ensure that there will be no excessive electromagnetic energy radiation, thereby ensuring the safety of the human body using the mobile phone.
  • SAR absorption rate
  • the safety standard can also be expressed by MPE.
  • MPE is specifically expressed by the amount of electromagnetic field or power density (PD).
  • the MPE safety value is formulated so that the corresponding SAR value cannot exceed its limit under any exposure conditions.
  • the safety standard is usually expressed by MPE, and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) MPE is limited to 11 milliwatts per square centimeter (mW/cm 2 ).
  • FCC Federal Communications Commission
  • the radiation intensity is jointly affected by the transmission power and the transmission antenna gain. The estimation of radiation intensity allows time domain averaging, and the average time ranges from 2s to 6min.
  • the "MPE problem” or the “MPE risk” may be used to indicate that the radiation intensity caused by the signal sent by the terminal exceeds the MPE.
  • the following embodiments take the "MPE problem” as an example for description, but the application is not limited to this.
  • the uplink transmission in the embodiment of this application may refer to the transmission of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), the transmission of the uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH), or the uplink sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS). ) Transmission.
  • the network device can schedule PUSCH through DCI format 0, and enable the default uplink transmission mode through enableDefaultBeamPlForPUSCH0_0, that is, the terminal uses the receive beam of the downlink control channel as the PUSCH transmit beam, and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel is used as the PUSCH transmit beam.
  • Path loss estimation reference signal is used as the PUSCH transmit beam.
  • the network device can also enable the default uplink transmission mode through enableDefaultBeamPlForPUCCH, that is, the terminal uses the receiving beam of the downlink control channel as the PUCCH sending beam, and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel is used as the path loss estimation reference signal for sending the PUCCH.
  • the network device can also enable the default uplink transmission mode through enableDefaultBeamPlForSRS, that is, the terminal uses the receiving beam of the downlink control channel as the sending beam of the SRS, and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel is used as the path loss estimation reference signal for sending the SRS.
  • the receiving beam of the downlink control channel and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel may be stipulated by the protocol.
  • Fig. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of an uplink transmission method in a traditional solution.
  • the terminal sends capability information to a network device.
  • the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal has beam consistency or whether the terminal needs to pass uplink beam scanning to obtain beam consistency.
  • the capability information may also include whether the terminal supports the default uplink transmission mode.
  • the default uplink transmission mode may specifically be at least one of the default transmission mode of PUSCH, the default transmission mode of PUCCH, or the default transmission mode of SRS.
  • the network device sends configuration information to the terminal, where the configuration information is used to indicate related configurations for beam training.
  • the configuration information can be used to configure downlink transmission resources.
  • the configuration information can also be used to configure the terminal to enable the default uplink transmission mode.
  • the network device sends multiple reference signals to the terminal.
  • the terminal measures the multiple reference signals.
  • the terminal sends a measurement report to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the selected downlink beam.
  • the network device may also send instruction information to the terminal, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to update the receive beam of the downlink control channel.
  • the terminal determines an uplink beam according to the default uplink transmission mode, and uses the uplink beam to send an uplink signal to the network device.
  • the uplink transmission beam can directly refer to the downlink beam.
  • the network equipment only needs to send downlink beam switching signaling, and the terminal can automatically follow the downlink beam switching and update its own uplink transmission beam and transmission power, without the need for the network equipment to specifically send signaling Perform the switching of the notification uplink transmission beam.
  • a basic premise of the above-mentioned R16 scheme is that the terminal has beam consistency. However, in actual communication, the beam consistency of the terminal is not necessarily established.
  • the receiving and sending channel calibration is not performed when leaving the factory, resulting in the directions of the receiving beam and the sending beam not being completely consistent, or even large deviations.
  • the terminal supports beam consistency under normal conditions, but needs to temporarily distinguish the uplink and downlink beam conditions in some cases.
  • One situation is: the direction of the uplink transmission beam is toward the human body, which causes the MPE problem. Because the human body is blocked, it will cause certain damage to the human body.
  • the terminal In order for the terminal to reduce the radiation intensity of the uplink signal to the safe range of the human body, it can be achieved by reducing the transmission power of the uplink signal, which will cause the downlink beam to receive the downlink signal, but the uplink signal sent by the uplink transmission beam corresponding to the downlink beam cannot be transmitted.
  • the beam consistency is temporarily destroyed.
  • Another situation is that the terminal moves or rotates during the process from receiving the downlink control channel to performing uplink transmission, so that the beam consistency is temporarily destroyed.
  • Fig. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal receives multiple reference signals from a network device.
  • the network device sends the multiple reference signals to the terminal.
  • the terminal sends a measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and is used to indicate the multiple reference signals
  • the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal in.
  • the network device receives the measurement report.
  • the terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals, thereby selecting a beam corresponding to a reference signal (that is, the second reference signal) from the multiple reference signals as the downlink beam .
  • the terminal may also indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals in the measurement report.
  • the terminal can find two beams to report to the network device, one for downlink transmission and one for uplink transmission. In this way, when the terminal does not meet the beam consistency, the backup uplink beam can be found in advance, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal, avoiding the uplink beam training to find the uplink beam again, thereby improving the communication efficiency of the uplink beam .
  • the terminal and the network device may agree that the uplink beam indicated by the measurement report is used as the backup uplink beam of the terminal.
  • the measurement report may directly indicate that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is used as the backup uplink beam in the middle.
  • the terminal may select the second reference signal according to the signal quality.
  • the signal quality of the second reference signal meets a preset quality requirement, and more specifically, the signal quality of the second reference signal is a reference signal with the best signal quality among the multiple reference signals.
  • the terminal may also select the first reference signal according to the signal quality.
  • the first reference signal satisfies a certain quality requirement.
  • the first reference signal may be a reference signal with the best signal quality other than the second reference signal selected from a plurality of reference signals.
  • the uplink beam in the embodiment of the present application may be a beam pair link, that is, the uplink beam pair link includes the transmission beam for the terminal to send the uplink signal, and the network device receives the uplink signal A communication link composed of the receive beams.
  • the network device uses beam 1 and beam 2 to send reference signals, respectively, and the terminal uses beam 3, beam 4, and beam 5 to receive reference signals.
  • the terminal detects that the signal quality of the reference signal sent by the beam 2 received by the beam 3 is the best (that is, beam 3 and beam 2 are used as the downlink beam pair link), and beam 1 and beam 5 can be used as backup uplink beams in uplink communication On the link.
  • the terminal informs the network device of the information of the first reference signal (beam 1) and the second reference signal (beam 2) through measurement reports. In this way, the network device can use the beam 2 as the serving beam of the terminal, and perform downlink transmission through the beam 2, and accordingly, the terminal uses the beam 3 to receive the downlink signal.
  • the terminal uses the beam 5 to send the uplink signal. Accordingly, the network device uses the beam 1 to receive the uplink signal.
  • the receiving beam or the sending beam is not separately described below.
  • the beam 1 and the beam 2 are the beams of the network device.
  • the uplink communication it refers to the receiving beam of the network device, and in the downlink communication, it refers to the transmitting beam of the network device.
  • beam 3, beam 4, and beam 5 are the beams of the terminal. In uplink communication, they refer to the terminal's transmitting beam, and in downlink communication, they refer to the terminal's receiving beam.
  • the measurement report may also include the signal quality of the first reference signal or the signal quality of the second reference signal.
  • the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used to indicate the second reference signal. 2. Downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be indicated by the first reference signal information
  • the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal may be indicated by the second reference signal information.
  • the first reference signal information is the signal identifier of the first reference signal or the resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  • the second reference signal information is the signal identifier of the second reference signal or the resource identifier of the second reference signal.
  • the signal identifier of the first reference signal or the second reference signal may be the reference signal number.
  • the resource identifier of the first reference signal may be the identifier of the resource corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the resource identifier of the second reference signal may be the identifier of the resource corresponding to the second reference signal.
  • Table 1 shows the resource identifier of the second reference signal in the embodiment of this application (for example, CSI-RS resource#a, CSI-RS resource#b, CSI-RS resource#c, CSI-RS resource#d ), the relationship between downlink beams (BS TX and UE RX) and measurement reports.
  • (CSI-RS resource#c, CSI-RS resource#d) has an association relationship, where CSI-RS resource#c is a reference for downlink communication, CSI-RS resource#d is a reference for uplink communication;
  • (CSI-RS resource#a, CSI-RS resource#b) has an association relationship, where CSI-RS resource#a is downlink communication
  • CSI-RS resource#b is a reference for uplink communication.
  • the resource identification can be realized by the value of bits.
  • the measurement report includes a plurality of bits, the first part of the plurality of bits is used to indicate the resource identifier of the first reference signal, and the second part of the bits is used to indicate the resource identifier of the second reference signal. It is understandable that, in addition to the first part of bits and the second part of bits, the measurement report may also include a third part of bits, and the value of the third part of bits may be used to indicate the quality of the reference signal. As shown in Table 2, the format of the measurement report is shown.
  • the resource identifier of the first reference signal may be CSI-RS resource#b
  • the resource identifier of the second reference signal may be CSI-RS resource#a.
  • the reported amount of the measurement report may be configured by the network.
  • the report format of the measurement report may be configured by the network device, or may be predefined by the protocol.
  • the value of the bits included in the measurement is 00000011101
  • the network device receives the measurement report and can determine that the first two digits 00 represent the resource identifier CSI-RS resource#a of the second reference signal, and the middle 7 bits 0000111 are CSI- The quality of RS resource#a, the last two bits 01 represent the resource identifier CSI-RS resource#b (that is, the uplink beam) of the first reference signal.
  • the first reference signal has an association relationship with the second reference signal.
  • the terminal selecting the second reference signal may be determined according to the association relationship with the first reference signal.
  • the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal has an association relationship with the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the association relationship may be that the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal are low-correlation beams; or the association relationship may be that the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal and the first reference signal are low-correlation beams.
  • the uplink beams corresponding to the reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  • the low correlation beam may be a non-adjacent beam, or a beam whose distance is less than a preset threshold.
  • the terminal may first select multiple reference signals as candidate first reference signals according to the quality threshold requirement, and then select the final first reference signal according to the low correlation beam with the second reference signal.
  • the terminal may first select multiple reference signals as candidate first reference signals according to the low correlation beam with the second reference signal, and then select the final first reference signal according to the quality threshold requirement.
  • the beams formed by different antenna panels may be beams formed by antenna panels of different terminals, or beams formed by different antenna panels in the same terminal, which is not limited in this application.
  • association relationship between the first reference signal and the second reference signal may also be determined by other protocols predefined or rules configured by the network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal may send the association relationship to the network device, or the network device may determine the association relationship between the reference signals by itself.
  • the terminal may also receive instruction information from the network device, and the instruction information may be used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the uplink beam of is used as the transmission mode of the candidate uplink beam, where the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  • the network device may send instruction information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, after receiving the indication information, the measurement report sent to the network device by the terminal may be used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Therefore, the network device can flexibly control whether the terminal uses the first uplink transmission mode for uplink transmission, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the preset reference signal may be a reference signal corresponding to a downlink control channel.
  • the terminal selects the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal from multiple reference signals as the target downlink beam, and according to the beam consistency of the terminal, the preset It is assumed that the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal is used for uplink transmission.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal indicated to the network device by the terminal through the measurement report is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal, that is, the terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform Uplink transmission.
  • first uplink transmission mode as the "enhanced default transmission mode”.
  • the indication information can be carried in any of DCI, MAC CE, or resource control (radio resource control, RRC).
  • the terminal sends capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal.
  • the capability information may be sent separately or simultaneously with the capability information in step 201 shown in FIG. 2, which is not limited in this application.
  • the first uplink transmission mode in the embodiment of the present application may include at least one of the uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of SRS.
  • the first uplink transmission mode may be set for all uplink signals, or may be set for different uplink signals, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal may also send first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal when it detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, it may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission model. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • obstruction that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device
  • the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission model. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the network device may send the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may also send second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode.
  • the second uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal is used as the candidate uplink beam, that is, the "default transmission mode".
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the terminal detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, it may send the second request information to the network device to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, after receiving the second request information, the network device may perform uplink beam training, or send the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to enter the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal when the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is not appropriate, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal find a suitable uplink beam. Thereby improving the uplink transmission efficiency.
  • the current uplink transmission mode that is, the second uplink transmission mode
  • the terminal may further send the first request information. Or the terminal sends the second request information after sending the first request information. Or, the terminal only sends the first request information, or the terminal only sends the second request information, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal can determine the distance between the human body and the device through the infrared sensor, and then estimate whether the radiation intensity on the surface of the human body will cause the MPE problem.
  • the terminal needs to use the transmission beam corresponding to the QCL type D reference signal identifier in the downlink control channel resource set (CORESET) beam indicator (TCI state) to transmit the uplink signal/channel.
  • CORESET downlink control channel resource set
  • TCI state downlink control channel resource set
  • MPE maximum allowable exposure
  • the default uplink beam may no longer be applicable, because the terminal must greatly reduce the uplink transmission power and transmission duty cycle in the beam direction, which greatly damages the uplink coverage.
  • One solution is to introduce an exit mechanism initiated by the terminal, so that the base station can learn that the MPE risk has occurred on the terminal side.
  • the terminal can provide the base station with relevant information about the backup beam through downlink beam reporting. After exiting the default mode, the terminal can use the backup transmission beam for uplink transmission.
  • the terminal can use the backup transmission beam for uplink transmission.
  • UE shall transmit UL channels/signals by using the Tx beamcorresponding to QCL TypeD RS ID contained in a CORESET TCI state.
  • analogbeamforming in FR2 may create human problems ,for example,Maximumpermissibleexposure(MPE)issue about RFexposurelimitationforsafety.In this case,the default Txbeam would not be suitable anymore since UE has to limit of the maximum power uplink duty cycle and which up harming FR2 UL coverage.
  • MPE Maximumpermissibleexposure
  • One solution is to introduce exit mechanism of the default UL mode which can be initiated by UE to let gNB be aware of MPE risk at UE side.
  • To enable this exchange mechanism and to maintain this uniformity after the UL provide backup UL Tx beam information to gNB, for example, via DL beam reporting. After exiting from default mode, UE could use the backup Tx beam for UL transmission.
  • the terminal or network device supports the terminal initiated default uplink mode exit mechanism (support UE-initiated exit mechanism from default UL mode).
  • the terminal sending the second request information to the network device may specifically be that the terminal sends uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that obstruction or rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling includes the second Request information.
  • the terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal.
  • the uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
  • the terminal may also send the uplink signaling in other situations where the current uplink beam is detected to be inappropriate (that is, MPE problem), which is not limited in this application.
  • the uplink signaling may be any one of uplink control information (uplink control link, UCI), media access control control element (MAC CE), and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • uplink control information uplink control link, UCI
  • MAC CE media access control control element
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • the uplink signaling may also be other signaling, which is not limited in this application.
  • a risk notification message or a handover request message is used to request the network device to switch the transmitting beam of the terminal.
  • the terminal may also send third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter the second uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal may send fourth request information to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears.
  • the network device may exit the first uplink transmission mode by default when receiving the third request information.
  • the third request information can be sent independently, or it can be carried in an existing message (for example, UCI, MAC CE or PUSCH and sent.
  • the fourth request information can be sent independently. It can also be carried in an existing message and sent.
  • third request information or the fourth request information can be replaced by a "risk release notice", which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal exits the first uplink transmission mode when the timer expires.
  • the terminal may set a timer, and within the time range when the timer is effective, the terminal uses the uplink beam determined by the first uplink transmission mode to perform uplink transmission. When the timer expires, the terminal uses the uplink beam determined by the second uplink transmission mode to perform uplink transmission. This avoids the transmission of signaling, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the terminal may determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and perform uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
  • the terminal may first determine the path loss of the first reference signal, and determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and then determine the uplink transmission power according to the uplink transmission power, and the uplink beam and the corresponding uplink beam of the first reference signal.
  • the network device performs uplink communication.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal acquires an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be a preset uplink beam.
  • the terminal can notify the network equipment of the preset uplink beam, and in the case of an MPE problem with the terminal, the preset uplink beam can be used for uplink transmission, that is, a fault-tolerant mechanism is added, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • the preset uplink beam may be set by the terminal itself, or may be stipulated by the agreement, which is not limited in this application.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal can be obtained in the solution shown in FIG. 3, that is, the terminal obtains the first reference signal by measuring multiple reference signals. To avoid repetition, this is not done here. Go into details.
  • the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be obtained by performing uplink beam training in advance, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal sends instruction information to the network device, where the instruction information is used to indicate an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the network device receives the instruction information from the terminal.
  • the terminal sends instruction information to the network device, where the instruction information indicates the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the terminal sends the instruction information to the network device, which helps the network device to accurately receive the uplink signal, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
  • step 502 may specifically be that the terminal sends a first measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, and the first measurement report includes an indication information.
  • the terminal may also send a second measurement report to the network device, where the second measurement report is used to indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  • the terminal may also obtain the second reference signal according to multiple reference signal measurements, and notify the network device of the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal through the second measurement report.
  • the second measurement report and the first measurement report are the same measurement report, that is, the same measurement report indicates the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal at the same time.
  • the second measurement report is different from the first measurement report, that is, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are respectively indicated through different measurement reports.
  • the sequence in which the terminal obtains the first reference signal and the second reference signal through measurement is not limited.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 has the same meaning as the same terms in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 5.
  • the terminal determines second request information, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal Transmission mode.
  • the terminal sends the second request information to the network device.
  • the network device receives the second request information.
  • the terminal may refer to the steps after the terminal sends the second request information to the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • step 602 may specifically be that the terminal sends the second request information to the network device when the terminal detects the occlusion or detects the rotation of the terminal.
  • the terminal may also send the second request information due to other motivations, which is not limited in this application.
  • step 602 may specifically be that the terminal sends uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate detection of obstruction or rotation of the terminal, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information.
  • the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • the terminal may also send first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam and preamble corresponding to the first reference signal. It is assumed that the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal has different transmission modes.
  • the terminal can stop uplink transmission or perform other operations, or enter the first uplink transmission mode, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal may also use a beam predefined by the protocol for uplink transmission.
  • the predefined beam can be one or more of the following: the transmission beam used by the terminal for initial access, the transmission beam used by the terminal for random access, the transmission beam used by the terminal for the last random access, and the terminal receives system messages ( Including but not limited to the receiving beams corresponding to the receiving beams of master information block (MIB) and system information blocks (SIBs), and the control channel of the terminal control channel resource set number 0 (CORESET 0)
  • MIB master information block
  • SIBs system information blocks
  • CORESET 0 control channel of the terminal control channel resource set number 0
  • the terminal may also use a path loss reference signal predefined by the protocol to perform path loss estimation.
  • the predefined path loss reference signal can be one or more of the following: SS/PBCH during the initial access of the terminal, SS/PBCH during the random access of the terminal, and the last random access process of the terminal In the SS/PBCH, the reference signal corresponding to the receiving beam of the terminal receiving system messages (including but not limited to MIB, SIBs, etc.), and the receiving beam corresponding to the control channel resource set of the terminal control channel resource set number 0 (CORESET 0) Reference signal, the QCL type D reference signal in the TCI state with the largest or smallest TCI state ID.
  • the terminal may also send third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam and preamble corresponding to the first reference signal. It is assumed that the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal has the same transmission mode.
  • the terminal may also send fourth request information to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  • the terminal may also receive capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode
  • the first uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
  • the methods and operations implemented by the terminal can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the terminal, and the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by the terminal.
  • the components (such as chips or circuits) of network equipment are implemented.
  • each network element such as a transmitting end device or a receiving end device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function in order to realize the above-mentioned functions.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiments of the present application can divide the transmitting end device or the receiving end device into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. middle.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented either in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of using the corresponding functional modules to divide each functional module.
  • the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 700 for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 700 may correspond to the terminals or chips in the terminals shown in FIG. 1, and the terminals or chips in the terminals in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, and FIG. Any function of the terminal in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6.
  • the device 700 includes a receiving module 710 and a sending module 720.
  • the receiving module 710 is configured to receive multiple reference signals from a network device
  • the sending module 720 is configured to send a measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and to indicate the multiple reference signals.
  • the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used to indicate the second reference signal. 2. Downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
  • the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  • the first reference signal has an association relationship with the second reference signal, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams, or the second reference signal
  • the uplink beam corresponding to an uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  • the receiving module 710 is further configured to receive instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the beam has a different transmission mode from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  • the sending module 720 is also used to send first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and/or the sending module 720 is also used to send The network device sends second request information, the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal Transmission mode.
  • the sending module 720 is specifically configured to: send uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate detection of obstruction or rotation of the terminal, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information,
  • the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • the sending module 720 is further configured to send third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode corresponds to the first reference signal. And/or the sending module 720 is further configured to send fourth request information to the network device, and the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first Uplink transmission mode.
  • the sending module 720 is further configured to send capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset reference Different transmission modes of the uplink beam corresponding to the signal.
  • the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of sounding reference signal SRS.
  • the sending module 720 is further configured to use the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device.
  • the device further includes a processing module configured to determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal;
  • the sending module 720 is configured to perform uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
  • FIG. 8 shows a communication device 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 800 may be the terminal described in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, or FIG. 6.
  • the device can adopt the hardware architecture shown in FIG. 8.
  • the device may include a processor 810 and a transceiver 830.
  • the device may also include a memory 840.
  • the processor 810, the transceiver 830, and the memory 840 communicate with each other through an internal connection path.
  • the related functions implemented by the processing module in FIG. 7 may be implemented by the processor 810, and the related functions implemented by the receiving module 710 and the sending module 720 may be implemented by the processor 810 controlling the transceiver 830.
  • the processor 810 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a dedicated processor, or one or more It is an integrated circuit that implements the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • a processor may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
  • it can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processor can be used to control communication devices (such as base stations, terminals, or chips), execute software programs, and process data in the software programs.
  • the processor 810 may include one or more processors, such as one or more central processing units (CPU).
  • processors such as one or more central processing units (CPU).
  • CPU central processing units
  • the processor may be a single processor.
  • the core CPU can also be a multi-core CPU.
  • the transceiver 830 is used to send and receive data and/or signals, and to receive data and/or signals.
  • the transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver, the transmitter is used to send data and/or signals, and the receiver is used to receive data and/or signals.
  • the memory 840 includes, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable memory (erasable read only memory, EPROM), and read-only memory.
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable read only memory
  • read-only memory EPROM
  • a compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM
  • the memory 840 is used to store related instructions and data.
  • the memory 840 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal, and may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 810.
  • the processor 810 is configured to control the transceiver to perform information transmission with the terminal.
  • the processor 810 is configured to control the transceiver to perform information transmission with the terminal.
  • the apparatus 800 may further include an output device and an input device.
  • the output device communicates with the processor 810 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc.
  • the input device communicates with the processor 810 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device can be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
  • FIG. 8 only shows a simplified design of the communication device.
  • the device may also contain other necessary components, including but not limited to any number of transceivers, processors, controllers, memories, etc., and all terminals that can implement this application are within the protection scope of this application. within.
  • the device 800 may be a chip, for example, a communication chip that can be used in a terminal to implement related functions of the processor 810 in the terminal.
  • the chip can be a field programmable gate array, a dedicated integrated chip, a system chip, a central processing unit, a network processor, a digital signal processing circuit, a microcontroller, and a programmable controller or other integrated chips for realizing related functions.
  • the chip may optionally include one or more memories for storing program codes. When the codes are executed, the processor realizes corresponding functions.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be a terminal or a circuit.
  • the device can be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 900 for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 900 may correspond to the network device or the chip in the network device shown in FIG. 1, or the network device or the chip in the network device in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, and FIG. Any function of the network device in the method.
  • the device 900 includes a sending module 910 and a receiving module 920.
  • the sending module 910 is configured to send multiple reference signals to the terminal
  • the receiving module 920 is configured to receive a measurement report from the terminal, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and the measurement report is used to indicate the second one of the multiple reference signals.
  • the downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal is configured to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals.
  • the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used to indicate the second reference signal. 2. Downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
  • the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  • the first reference signal has an association relationship with the second reference signal, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams, or the second reference signal
  • the uplink beam corresponding to an uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  • the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink corresponding to the first reference signal.
  • the beam has a different transmission mode from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  • the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive first request information from the terminal, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and/or the device further includes a processing module, which processes The module is used to turn off the second uplink transmission mode when the first request information is received, and the second uplink transmission mode is the same transmission of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal model.
  • the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive second request information from the terminal, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal
  • the corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; the device further includes a processing module configured to turn off the second uplink transmission mode when the second request information is received.
  • the receiving module 920 is specifically configured to: receive uplink signaling from the terminal, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate detection of obstruction or rotation of the terminal, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information,
  • the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  • the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive third request information from the terminal, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode corresponds to the first reference signal
  • the uplink beam of the reference signal corresponds to the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; or the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive fourth request information from the terminal, and the fourth request information is used to request to quit the first uplink transmission model.
  • the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset reference Different transmission modes of the uplink beam corresponding to the signal.
  • the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of SRS.
  • FIG. 10 shows an apparatus 1000 for uplink transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1000 may be the network device described in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, or FIG. 6.
  • the device can adopt the hardware architecture shown in FIG. 10.
  • the device may include a processor 1010 and a transceiver 1020.
  • the device may also include a memory 1030.
  • the processor 1010, the transceiver 1020, and the memory 1030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path.
  • the related functions implemented by the processing module in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may be implemented by the processor 1010, and the related functions implemented by the sending module 910 and the receiving module 920 may be implemented by the processor 1010 controlling the transceiver 1020.
  • the processor 1010 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a dedicated processor, or one or more It is an integrated circuit that implements the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • a processor may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
  • it can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processor can be used to control communication devices (such as base stations, terminals, or chips), execute software programs, and process data in the software programs.
  • the processor 1010 may include one or more processors, such as one or more central processing units (CPU).
  • processors such as one or more central processing units (CPU).
  • CPU central processing units
  • the CPU may be a single processor.
  • the core CPU can also be a multi-core CPU.
  • the transceiver 1020 is used to send and receive data and/or signals, and to receive data and/or signals.
  • the transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver, the transmitter is used to send data and/or signals, and the receiver is used to receive data and/or signals.
  • the memory 1030 includes, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable memory (erasable read only memory, EPROM), and read-only memory.
  • RAM random access memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable read only memory
  • read-only memory erasable read only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc
  • the memory 1030 is used to store program codes and data of the network device, and may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 1010.
  • the processor 1010 is used to control the transceiver to perform information transmission with the terminal.
  • the processor 1010 is used to control the transceiver to perform information transmission with the terminal.
  • the apparatus 1000 may further include an output device and an input device.
  • the output device communicates with the processor 1010 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc.
  • the input device communicates with the processor 1010 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device can be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
  • FIG. 10 only shows a simplified design of the communication device.
  • the device can also contain other necessary components, including but not limited to any number of transceivers, processors, controllers, memories, etc., and all network devices that can implement this application are protected by this application. Within range.
  • the apparatus 1000 may be a chip, for example, a communication chip that can be used in a network device, and is used to implement related functions of the processor 1010 in the network device.
  • the chip can be a field programmable gate array, a dedicated integrated chip, a system chip, a central processing unit, a network processor, a digital signal processing circuit, a microcontroller, and a programmable controller or other integrated chips for realizing related functions.
  • the chip may optionally include one or more memories for storing program codes. When the codes are executed, the processor realizes corresponding functions.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be a network device or a circuit.
  • the device can be used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 11 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminals may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 11. In actual end products, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit of the terminal, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit of the terminal.
  • the terminal includes a transceiver unit 1110 and a processing unit 1120.
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, and so on.
  • the processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiving unit 1110 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiving unit 1110 can be regarded as the sending unit, that is, the transceiving unit 1110 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiving unit 1110 is used to perform sending and receiving operations on the terminal side in the foregoing method embodiment, and the processing unit 1120 is used to perform other operations on the terminal in addition to the transceiving operation in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the processing unit 1120 is configured to execute the processing steps on the terminal side in FIG. 3.
  • the transceiving unit 1110 is configured to perform the transceiving operations in steps 301 and 302 in FIG. 3, and/or the transceiving unit 1110 is also configured to perform other transceiving steps on the terminal side in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip When the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
  • the device shown in FIG. 12 can also be referred to.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processor 810 in FIG. 8.
  • the device includes a processor 1201, a data sending processor 1203, and a data receiving processor 1205.
  • the processing module in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may be the processor 1201 in FIG. 12 and complete corresponding functions.
  • the sending module 720 and the receiving module 710 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may be the sending data processor 1203 and the receiving data processor 1205 in FIG. 12.
  • the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 12, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
  • the processing device 1300 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication device in this embodiment can be used as the modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1303 and an interface 1304.
  • the processor 1303 performs the functions of the processing module in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the interface 1304 performs the functions of the receiving module 710 and the sending module 720 described above.
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1306, a processor 1303, and a program stored in the memory and capable of running on the processor, and the processor implements the method described in the embodiment when the program is executed.
  • the memory 1306 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1300, as long as the memory 1306 can be connected to the The processor 1303 is fine.
  • the network device may be as shown in FIG. 14, for example, the device 140 is a base station.
  • the base station can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station 140 may include one or more DU 1401 and one or more CU 1402.
  • CU1402 can communicate with the next-generation core network (NG core, NC).
  • the DU 1401 may include at least one antenna 14011, at least one radio frequency unit 14011, at least one processor 14013, and at least one memory 14014.
  • the DU 1401 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals, the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of the baseband processing.
  • the CU 1402 may include at least one processor 14022 and at least one memory 14021.
  • CU1402 and DU1401 can communicate through interfaces, where the control plane interface can be Fs-C, such as F1-C, and the user plane interface can be Fs-U, such as F1-U.
  • the CU 1402 part is mainly used for baseband processing, control of base stations, and so on.
  • the DU 1401 and the CU 1402 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the CU 1402 is the control center of the base station, which may also be referred to as a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions.
  • the CU 1402 may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the baseband processing on the CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network, for example, the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the functions of the above protocol layers are set in the CU, the protocol layer below PDCP, For example, functions such as the radio link control (RLC) layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer are set in the DU.
  • CU implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions
  • DU implements radio link control (radio link control, RLC), MAC and physical functions.
  • the function of the (physical, PHY) layer is the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the functions of the above protocol layers are set in the CU, the protocol layer below PDCP.
  • functions such as the radio link control (RLC) layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer are set in the DU.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • packet data convergence protocol packet data convergence protocol
  • MAC medium access control
  • the base station 140 may include one or more radio frequency units (RU), one or more DUs, and one or more CUs.
  • the DU may include at least one processor 14013 and at least one memory 14014
  • the RU may include at least one antenna 14011 and at least one radio frequency unit 14011
  • the CU may include at least one processor 14022 and at least one memory 14021.
  • the processor 14013 is configured to execute the processing steps on the network device side in FIG. 3.
  • the radio frequency unit 14011 is used to perform the receiving and sending operations in steps 301 and 302 in FIG. 3.
  • the CU1402 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, and can also support wireless access networks of different access standards.
  • Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the memory 14021 and the processor 14022 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the DU1401 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network with a single access indication (such as a 5G network), or can respectively support wireless access networks with different access standards (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the memory 14014 and the processor 14013 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the computer may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
  • the processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA ready-made programmable gate array
  • Programming logic devices discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory synchronous link DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • the following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
  • one embodiment or “an embodiment” mentioned throughout the specification means that a specific feature, structure, or characteristic related to the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the appearances of "in one embodiment” or “in an embodiment” in various places throughout the specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. In addition, these specific features, structures or characteristics can be combined in one or more embodiments in any suitable manner. It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Abstract

The present application provides an uplink transmission method and apparatus. A terminal receives a plurality of reference signals sent by a network device, and measures signal quality of the plurality of reference signals, so as to select a beam corresponding to one reference signal (i.e., a second reference signal) from the plurality of reference signals as a downlink beam. In addition, a terminal can also indicate, in the measurement report, an uplink beam corresponding to a first reference signal in the plurality of reference signals. In other words, the terminal can search for two beams and report same to the network device, one of the beams is used for downlink transmission, and the other is used for uplink transmission. In this way, when a terminal does not satisfy beam consistency, a backup uplink beam can be found in advance, so that the network device can accurately receive an uplink signal, a case of carrying out uplink beam training again for searching for an uplink beam is avoided, and thus the communication efficiency of uplink beams is improved.

Description

用于上行传输的方法和装置Method and device for uplink transmission 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,更具体地,涉及一种用于上行传输的方法和装置。This application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and device for uplink transmission.
背景技术Background technique
在高频通信系统中,为了克服路损,网络设备和终端通常都会使用具有方向性的高增益的天线阵列形成模拟波束来进行通信。一般来说,模拟波束是具有方向性的,可以用主瓣方向和波束宽度(例如,3dB)来描述一个模拟波束形状(beam pattern),波束宽度越窄,天线增益越大。网络设备和终端可以朝向特定的方向发送和接收。以下行通信为例,网络设备朝向特定方向发送,终端朝向特定方向接收,只有当发送和接收的方向对齐的情况下,才能实现正常通信。为了实现波束对齐(即发送端的发送波束与接收端的接收波束对齐),需要进行波束训练。In high-frequency communication systems, in order to overcome path loss, network equipment and terminals usually use directional high-gain antenna arrays to form analog beams for communication. Generally speaking, analog beams are directional. The main lobe direction and beam width (for example, 3dB) can be used to describe an analog beam pattern. The narrower the beam width, the greater the antenna gain. Network devices and terminals can send and receive in specific directions. Take the following communication as an example. The network device sends in a specific direction, and the terminal receives in a specific direction. Normal communication can only be realized when the sending and receiving directions are aligned. In order to achieve beam alignment (that is, alignment of the transmit beam at the transmitting end and the receive beam at the receiving end), beam training is required.
在第三代合作伙伴项目(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)标准新无线(new radio,NR))版本(release,R)15中,为了服务上行传输,网络设备需要通过信令配置终端的上行发送波束。若终端的上行发送波束发生变化,则网络设备需要大量的信令进行重配置,导致了很大的信令开销。同时,由于高层信令的频繁使用也带来了较大的时延。In the 3rd generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) standard new radio (new radio, NR) version (release, R) 15, in order to serve the uplink transmission, the network equipment needs to configure the terminal's uplink transmission through signaling Beam. If the uplink transmission beam of the terminal changes, the network device needs a lot of signaling for reconfiguration, resulting in a large signaling overhead. At the same time, the frequent use of high-level signaling also brings greater time delay.
在NR R16中,为了降低上行波束管理的开销和时延,定义了多种默认上行传输模式。例如,对于具有波束一致性的终端,上行发送波束可以直接参考下行波束。这样如果出现下行波束的切换,则网络设备只需要发送下行波束切换的信令,终端即可自动跟随下行波束的切换,更新自己的上行发送波束和上行发送功率,而不需要网络设备专门发送信令进行通知上行发送波束的切换。In NR R16, in order to reduce the overhead and delay of uplink beam management, multiple default uplink transmission modes are defined. For example, for a terminal with beam consistency, the uplink transmission beam can directly refer to the downlink beam. In this way, if there is a downlink beam switching, the network equipment only needs to send downlink beam switching signaling, and the terminal can automatically follow the downlink beam switching and update its own uplink transmission beam and uplink transmission power, without the need for the network equipment to specifically send signals. Command to notify the switching of the uplink transmission beam.
上述R16方案的一个基本前提是终端具有波束一致性。但是,在实际通信中,终端的波束一致性并不一定成立。因此,在终端不支持波束一致的情况下,或者在支持波束一致但临时波束不一致的情况下,终端如何进行上行传输亟待解决。A basic premise of the above-mentioned R16 scheme is that the terminal has beam consistency. However, in actual communication, the beam consistency of the terminal is not necessarily established. Therefore, in the case that the terminal does not support beam consistency, or in the case of supporting beam consistency but temporary beam inconsistency, how the terminal performs uplink transmission needs to be solved urgently.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种用于上行传输的方法和装置,能够有助于在终端的波束不一致的情况下实现上行传输,避免了重新进行波束训练导致的上行传输的长时延或中断,从而提高了通信效率。The present application provides a method and device for uplink transmission, which can help realize uplink transmission when the beams of the terminal are inconsistent, avoiding long delay or interruption of uplink transmission caused by re-beam training, thereby improving Communication efficiency.
第一方面,提供了一种用于上行传输的方法,该方法包括:获取第一参考信号对应的上行波束;向该网络设备发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束。In a first aspect, a method for uplink transmission is provided. The method includes: acquiring an uplink beam corresponding to a first reference signal; and sending instruction information to the network device, where the instruction information is used to indicate the Uplink beam.
终端获取第一参考信号对应的上行波束,并通过指示信息告知网络设备。这样在终端不满足波束一致性的情况下,可以提前找到备份上行波束,以使得网络设备能够准确的接收到上行信号,避免了重新进行上行波束训练寻找上行波束,从而有助于提高上行波束的 通信效率。The terminal obtains the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and informs the network device through the instruction information. In this way, when the terminal does not meet the beam consistency, the backup uplink beam can be found in advance, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal, avoiding the re-uplink beam training to find the uplink beam, thereby helping to improve the uplink beam performance. Communication efficiency.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一参考信号对应的上行波束为预设上行波束。In some possible implementation manners, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is a preset uplink beam.
终端可以将预设上行波束告知网络设备,在终端发生MPE问题的情况下,可以采用预设上行波束进行上行传输,使得网络设备能够准确的接收到上行信号。即增加了容错机制,从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。The terminal can notify the network device of the preset uplink beam, and in the case of an MPE problem with the terminal, the preset uplink beam can be used for uplink transmission, so that the network device can accurately receive the uplink signal. That is, a fault-tolerant mechanism is added, which helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收多个参考信号;其中,该获取第一参考信号对应的上行波束包括:确定该多个参考信号中的该第一参考信号对应的上行波束。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving a plurality of reference signals; wherein the obtaining the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal includes: determining the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the plurality of reference signals .
终端接收网络设备发送的多个参考信号,并测量该多个参考信号的信号质量。这样终端可以从该多个参考信号中选择一个参考信号(即第一参考信号),并将该第一参考信号对应的上行波束通过指示信息告知网络设备,使得网络设备更进一步能够准确的接收到上行信号,从而有助于更进一步提高上行传输的效率。The terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals. In this way, the terminal can select a reference signal (ie, the first reference signal) from the multiple reference signals, and notify the network device of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the indication information, so that the network device can further accurately receive Uplink signal, which helps to further improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送指示信息包括:向该网络设备发送测量该多个参考信号的第一测量报告,该第一测量报告包括该指示信息。In some possible implementation manners, the sending instruction information to the network device includes: sending a first measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the first measurement report includes the instruction information.
终端可以通过测量报告的方式告知终端选中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,从而有助于网络设备能够准确的接收到上行信号,提高了上行传输的效率。The terminal can inform the terminal of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping the network device to accurately receive the uplink signal and improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向该网络设备发送测量该多个参考信号的第二测量报告,该第二测量报告用于指示该多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending a second measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the second measurement report is used to indicate that the second reference signal of the multiple reference signals corresponds to The downlink beam.
终端可以通过测量报告的方式告知终端选中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束,从而有助于提高下行通信的通信质量。The terminal can inform the terminal of the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping to improve the communication quality of the downlink communication.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一测量报告与该第二测量报告为同一个测量报告。In some possible implementation manners, the first measurement report and the second measurement report are the same measurement report.
该指示信息可以携带在第二测量报告中,从而节省了传输指示信息的信令开销。The indication information can be carried in the second measurement report, thereby saving signaling overhead for transmitting indication information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,该第一参考信号信息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,该第二参考信号信息用于指示该第二参考信号对应的下行波束。In some possible implementations, the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used for To indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
在第一测量报告和第二测量报告为同一个测量报告(下述以“该测量报告”为例进行说明)的情况下,第一参考信号对应的上行波束可以是通过第一参考信号信息指示的,第二参考信号对应的下行波束可以是通过第二参考信号信息指示的,即本实施例提供了一种实现通知网络设备的具体方式。In the case that the first measurement report and the second measurement report are the same measurement report (the “measurement report” is taken as an example below), the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be indicated by the first reference signal information Yes, the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal may be indicated by the second reference signal information, that is, this embodiment provides a specific method for implementing notification to the network device.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一参考信号信息包括该第一参考信号的信号标识或该第一参考信号的资源标识。In some possible implementation manners, the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
通过信号标识或资源标识指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,相对于通过标识上行发送波束和上行接收波束通知网络设备能够减少资源开销。Indicating the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the signal identifier or the resource identifier can reduce resource overhead compared to notifying the network device through the identifier of the uplink transmission beam and the uplink reception beam.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一参考信号与该第二参考信号具有关联关系,该关联关系为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或该第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。In some possible implementations, the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams , Or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
第一参考信号对应的上行波束和第二参考信号对应的下行波束可以是低相关波束,也可以是由不同天线面板形成的波束,这样有助于上下行传输的干扰尽可能的小,从而有助 于提高上下行的传输效率。The uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal can be low-correlation beams, or beams formed by different antenna panels, which helps to minimize the interference of uplink and downlink transmissions, thereby ensuring Helps improve the transmission efficiency of uplink and downlink.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送测量报告之前,该方法还包括:接收来自该网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementations, before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode The transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
网络设备可以向终端发送指示信息以指示该终端开启第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在接收到该指示信息之后,向网络设备发送的测量报告可以用于指示第一参考信号对应的上行波束。因此,网络设备可以灵活的控制终端是否采用第一上行传输模式进行上行传输,从而提高了上行传输的灵活性。The network device may send instruction information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode. That is, after receiving the indication information, the measurement report sent to the network device by the terminal may be used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Therefore, the network device can flexibly control whether the terminal uses the first uplink transmission mode for uplink transmission, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,在接收到来自该网络设备发送的该指示信息之前,该方法还包括:向该网络设备发送第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入该第一上行传输模式;和/或向该网络设备发送第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。In some possible implementation manners, before receiving the instruction information sent from the network device, the method further includes: sending first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink Transmission mode; and/or sending second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset The reference signal corresponds to the same transmission mode of the uplink beam.
终端在检测到遮挡(即终端和网络设备之间存在遮挡物),或检测到终端自身发生了旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第一请求信息以请求接入第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在确定当前的上行传输模式不合适的情况下,可以请求新的上行传输模式(即第一上行传输模式),从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。When the terminal detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
或者,终端在检测到当前的上行传输模式(即第二上行传输模式)不合适的情况下,可以告知网络设备退出第二上行传输模式,这样可以有助于终端寻找合适的上行波束,从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。Or, when the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is not appropriate, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal to find a suitable uplink beam. Helps improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送第二请求信息包括:向该网络设备发送上行信令,该上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息,该上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。In some possible implementation manners, the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected or the terminal rotation is detected, and the uplink signaling is detected. The command includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
终端在检测到遮挡或检测到终端旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送上行信令。该上行信令中可以携带该第二请求信息,这样终端避免了专门发送该第二请求信息,而是复用已有信令,从而减少了信令开销。The terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal. The uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向该网络设备发送第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;和/或向该网络设备发送第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。In some possible implementations, the method further includes: sending third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or the fourth request information is sent to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
终端在检测到MPE问题消失的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第三请求信息以请求恢复第二上行传输模式。这样终端可以灵活的在第一上行传输模式和第二上行传输模式之间进行切换,从而有助于更进一步提高上行传输的灵活性。When detecting that the MPE problem disappears, the terminal may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
或者,终端可以专门发送第四请求信息以请求退出第一上行传输模式,从而避免了在MPE问题消失的情况下依然使用第一上行传输模式,即有助于更进一步提高上行传输的传输效率。Alternatively, the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears, which helps to further improve the transmission efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送测量报告之前,该方法还包括:接收 能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementations, before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first uplink transmission mode. The uplink beam corresponding to a reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
终端可以提前向网络设备上报自己是否支持该第一上行传输模式。例如,在该能力信息支持该第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备才会向终端发送上述指示信息。这样避免了在终端不支持第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备依然为该终端配置开启第一上行传输模式造成信令或资源的浪费。The terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、物理上行控制信道PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或探测参考信号SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。In some possible implementations, the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of sounding reference signal SRS. .
该第一上行传输模式可以是针对所有的上行信号设置的,也可以针对不同的上行信号分别设置的,从而更进一步提高了上行传输的灵活性。The first uplink transmission mode may be set for all uplink signals, or may be set for different uplink signals, thereby further improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:采用该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,与该网络设备进行上行通信。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: using an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device.
终端采用第一参考信号对应的上行波束与网络设备进行上行通信,从而提高了上行传输的效率。The terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:根据该第一参考信号的路损,确定上行发送功率;根据该上行发送功率,与该网络设备进行上行通信。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: determining the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal; and performing uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
终端可以先确定出该第一参考信号的路损,并根据该第一参考信号的路损确定上行发送功率,进而根据该上行发送功率,以及该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与网络设备进行上行通信,从而提高了上行传输的传输效率,以及提高了上行传输的传输质量。The terminal may first determine the path loss of the first reference signal, and determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and then perform the communication with the network device based on the uplink transmission power and the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Uplink communication, thereby improving the transmission efficiency of the uplink transmission, and improving the transmission quality of the uplink transmission.
第二方面,提供了一种上行传输的方法,该方法包括:接收来自终端的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示第一参考信号对应的上行波束。In a second aspect, an uplink transmission method is provided. The method includes: receiving indication information from a terminal, where the indication information is used to indicate an uplink beam corresponding to a first reference signal.
网络设备接收指示第一参考信号对应的上行波束,并将该上行波束作为终端的备份上行波束。这样在终端不满足波束一致性的情况下,能够通过备份波束发送上行信号。相应地,网络设备根据该指示信息可以准确的接收到该上行信号,从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。The network device receives the uplink beam corresponding to the indicated first reference signal, and uses the uplink beam as a backup uplink beam of the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not meet the beam consistency, the uplink signal can be sent through the backup beam. Correspondingly, the network device can accurately receive the uplink signal according to the indication information, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一参考信号对应的上行波束为预设上行波束。In some possible implementation manners, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is a preset uplink beam.
终端可以将预设上行波束告知网络设备,在终端发生MPE问题的情况下,可以采用预设上行波束进行上行传输,这样网络设备能够准确的接收到终端的上行信号。即增加了容错机制,从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。The terminal can notify the network equipment of the preset uplink beam, and in the case of an MPE problem with the terminal, the preset uplink beam can be used for uplink transmission, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal of the terminal. That is, a fault-tolerant mechanism is added, which helps to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:发送多个参考信号,该第一参考信号为该多个参考信号中的一个参考信号。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending multiple reference signals, and the first reference signal is one of the multiple reference signals.
终端接收网络设备发送的多个参考信号,并测量该多个参考信号的信号质量。这样终端可以从该多个参考信号中选择一个参考信号(即第一参考信号),并将该第一参考信号对应的上行波束通过指示信息告知网络设备,使得网络设备更进一步能够准确的接收到上行信号,从而有助于更进一步提高上行传输的效率。The terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals. In this way, the terminal can select a reference signal (ie, the first reference signal) from the multiple reference signals, and notify the network device of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the indication information, so that the network device can further accurately receive Uplink signal, which helps to further improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该接收来自终端的指示信息包括:接收来自该终端的第一测量报告,该第一测量报告包括该指示信息,该第一测量报告为测量该多个参考信号得到的。In some possible implementation manners, the receiving the indication information from the terminal includes: receiving a first measurement report from the terminal, the first measurement report includes the indication information, and the first measurement report is obtained by measuring the multiple reference signals. of.
终端可以通过测量报告的方式告知终端选中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,从而有助于网络设备能够准确的接收到上行信号,提高了上行传输的效率。The terminal can inform the terminal of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping the network device to accurately receive the uplink signal and improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自该终端的第二测量报告,该第二测量报告为测量该多个参考信号得到的,且该第二测量报告用于指示该多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving a second measurement report from the terminal, the second measurement report is obtained by measuring the plurality of reference signals, and the second measurement report is used to indicate the plurality of reference signals The downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal in the reference signal.
终端可以通过测量报告的方式告知终端选中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束,从而有助于提高下行通信的通信质量。The terminal can inform the terminal of the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal selected by the measurement report, thereby helping to improve the communication quality of the downlink communication.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一测量报告与该第二测量报告为同一个测量报告。In some possible implementation manners, the first measurement report and the second measurement report are the same measurement report.
该指示信息可以携带在第二测量报告中,从而节省了传输指示信息的信令开销。The indication information can be carried in the second measurement report, thereby saving signaling overhead for transmitting indication information.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,该第一参考信号信息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,该第二参考信号信息用于指示该第二参考信号对应的下行波束。In some possible implementations, the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used for To indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
在第一测量报告和第二测量报告为同一个测量报告(下述以“该测量报告”为例进行说明)的情况下,第一参考信号对应的上行波束可以是通过第一参考信号信息指示的,第二参考信号对应的下行波束可以是通过第二参考信号信息指示的,即本实施例提供了一种实现通知网络设备的具体方式。In the case that the first measurement report and the second measurement report are the same measurement report (the “measurement report” is taken as an example below), the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be indicated by the first reference signal information Yes, the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal may be indicated by the second reference signal information, that is, this embodiment provides a specific method for implementing notification to the network device.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,该第一参考信号信息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,该第二参考信号信息用于指示该第二参考信号对应的下行波束。In some possible implementations, the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used for To indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一参考信号信息包括该第一参考信号的信号标识或该第一参考信号的资源标识。In some possible implementation manners, the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
通过信号标识或资源标识指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,相对于通过标识上行发送波束和上行接收波束通知网络设备能够减少资源开销。Indicating the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal through the signal identifier or the resource identifier can reduce resource overhead compared to notifying the network device through the identifier of the uplink transmission beam and the uplink reception beam.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一参考信号与该第二参考信号具有关联关系,该关联关系为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或该第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。In some possible implementations, the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams , Or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
第一参考信号对应的上行波束和第二参考信号对应的下行波束可以是低相关波束,也可以是由不同天线面板形成的波束,这样有助于上下行传输的干扰尽可能的小,从而有助于提高上下行的传输效率。The uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal can be low-correlation beams, or beams formed by different antenna panels, which helps to minimize the interference of uplink and downlink transmissions, thereby ensuring Helps improve the transmission efficiency of uplink and downlink.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送测量报告之前,该方法还包括:接收来自该网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementations, before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode The transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
网络设备可以向终端发送指示信息以指示该终端开启第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在接收到该指示信息之后,向网络设备发送的测量报告可以用于指示第一参考信号对应的上行波束。因此,网络设备可以灵活的控制终端是否采用第一上行传输模式进行上行传输,从而提高了上行传输的灵活性。The network device may send instruction information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode. That is, after receiving the indication information, the measurement report sent to the network device by the terminal may be used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Therefore, the network device can flexibly control whether the terminal uses the first uplink transmission mode for uplink transmission, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,在接收到来自该网络设备发送的该指示信息之前,该方法 还包括:向该网络设备发送第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入该第一上行传输模式;和/或向该网络设备发送第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。In some possible implementation manners, before receiving the instruction information sent from the network device, the method further includes: sending first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink Transmission mode; and/or sending second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset The reference signal corresponds to the same transmission mode of the uplink beam.
终端在检测到遮挡(即终端和网络设备之间存在遮挡物),或检测到终端自身发生了旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第一请求信息以请求接入第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在确定当前的上行传输模式不合适的情况下,可以请求新的上行传输模式(即第一上行传输模式),从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。When the terminal detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
或者,终端在检测到当前的上行传输模式(即第二上行传输模式)不合适的情况下,可以告知网络设备退出第二上行传输模式,这样可以有助于终端寻找合适的上行波束,从而提高上行传输效率。Or, when the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is inappropriate, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal find a suitable uplink beam, thereby improving Uplink transmission efficiency.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送第二请求信息包括:向该网络设备发送上行信令,该上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息,该上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。In some possible implementation manners, the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected or the terminal rotation is detected, and the uplink signaling is detected. The command includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
该上行信令中可以携带该第二请求信息,这样终端避免了专门发送该第二请求信息,而是复用已有信令,从而减少了信令开销。The uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向该网络设备发送第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;和/或向该网络设备发送第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。In some possible implementations, the method further includes: sending third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or the fourth request information is sent to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
终端在检测到MPE问题消失的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第三请求信息以请求恢复第二上行传输模式。这样终端可以灵活的在第一上行传输模式和第二上行传输模式之间进行切换,从而有助于更进一步提高上行传输的灵活性。When detecting that the MPE problem disappears, the terminal may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
或者,终端可以专门发送第四请求信息以请求退出第一上行传输模式,从而避免了在MPE问题消失的情况下依然使用第一上行传输模式,即有助于更进一步提高上行传输的传输效率。Alternatively, the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears, which helps to further improve the transmission efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送测量报告之前,该方法还包括:接收能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementations, before sending the measurement report to the network device, the method further includes: receiving capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first uplink transmission mode. The uplink beam corresponding to a reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
终端可以提前向网络设备上报自己是否支持该第一上行传输模式。例如,在该能力信息支持该第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备才会向终端发送上述指示信息。这样避免了在终端不支持第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备依然为该终端配置开启第一上行传输模式造成信令或资源的浪费。The terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、物理上行控制信道PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或探测参考信号SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。In some possible implementations, the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of sounding reference signal SRS. .
该第一上行传输模式可以是针对所有的上行信号设置的,也可以针对不同的上行信号分别设置的,从而更进一步提高了上行传输的灵活性。The first uplink transmission mode may be set for all uplink signals, or may be set for different uplink signals, thereby further improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:采用该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,与该网络设备进行上行通信。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: using an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device.
终端采用第一参考信号对应的上行波束与网络设备进行上行通信,从而提高了上行传输的效率。The terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:根据该第一参考信号的路损,确定上行发送功率;根据该上行发送功率,与该网络设备进行上行通信。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: determining the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal; and performing uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
终端可以先确定出该第一参考信号的路损,并根据该第一参考信号的路损确定上行发送功率,进而根据该上行发送功率,以及该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与网络设备进行上行通信。The terminal may first determine the path loss of the first reference signal, and determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and then perform the communication with the network device based on the uplink transmission power and the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Uplink communication.
第三方面,提供了一种用于上行传输的方法,该方法包括:确定第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;向网络设备发送该第二请求信息。In a third aspect, a method for uplink transmission is provided. The method includes: determining second request information, where the second request information is used to request to exit a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first The uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; sending the second request information to the network device.
终端可以向网络设备发送第二请求信息,可以请求网络设备退出第二上行传输模式,这样可以有助于终端灵活的寻找上行波束,从而提高上行传输的灵活性。The terminal can send the second request information to the network device, and can request the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal to flexibly find the uplink beam, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向网络设备发送该第二请求信息包括:在检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转的情况下,向该网络设备发送该第二请求信息。In some possible implementation manners, the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending the second request information to the network device when obstruction is detected or the rotation of the terminal is detected.
终端在检测到当前的上行传输模式(即第二上行传输模式)不合适的情况下,可以告知网络设备退出第二上行传输模式,这样可以有助于终端寻找合适的上行波束,从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。When the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is not suitable, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal find a suitable uplink beam, thereby helping Improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向网络设备发送该第二请求信息包括:向该网络设备发送上行信令,该上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息,该上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。In some possible implementation manners, the sending the second request information to the network device includes: sending uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected or the rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling is detected. The command includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
终端在检测到遮挡或检测到终端旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送上行信令。该上行信令中可以携带该第二请求信息,这样终端避免了专门发送该第二请求信息,而是复用已有信令,从而减少了信令开销。The terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal. The uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向该网络设备发送第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: sending first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
终端在检测到遮挡(即终端和网络设备之间存在遮挡物),或检测到终端自身发生了旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第一请求信息以请求接入第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在确定当前的上行传输模式不合适的情况下,可以请求新的上行传输模式(即第一上行传输模式),从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。When the terminal detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:向该网络设备发送第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;和/或向该网络设备发送第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。In some possible implementations, the method further includes: sending third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or the fourth request information is sent to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
终端在检测到MPE问题消失的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第三请求信息以请求恢 复第二上行传输模式。这样终端可以灵活的在第一上行传输模式和第二上行传输模式之间进行切换,从而有助于更进一步提高上行传输的灵活性。In the case where the terminal detects that the MPE problem disappears, it can send the third request message to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
或者,终端可以专门发送第四请求信息以请求退出第一上行传输模式,从而避免了在MPE问题消失的情况下依然使用第一上行传输模式,即有助于更进一步提高上行传输的传输效率。Alternatively, the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears, which helps to further improve the transmission efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该向该网络设备发送该第二请求信息之前,该方法还包括:发送能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementations, before sending the second request information to the network device, the method further includes: sending capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode It is a different transmission mode of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
终端可以提前向网络设备上报自己是否支持该第一上行传输模式。例如,在该能力信息支持该第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备才会向终端发送上述指示信息。这样避免了在终端不支持第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备依然为该终端配置开启第一上行传输模式造成信令或资源的浪费。The terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
第四方面,提供了一种用于上行传输的方法,该方法包括:接收来自终端的第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。In a fourth aspect, a method for uplink transmission is provided. The method includes: receiving second request information from a terminal, where the second request information is used to request to exit a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is The uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
网络设备接收终端发送的第二请求信息,该第二请求信息可以请求网络设备退出第二上行传输模式,这样可以有助于终端灵活的寻找上行波束,从而提高上行传输的灵活性。The network device receives the second request information sent by the terminal, and the second request information can request the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal to flexibly find the uplink beam, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该接收来自终端的第二请求信息包括:接收来自该终端的上行信令,该上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息,该上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。In some possible implementation manners, the receiving the second request information from the terminal includes: receiving uplink signaling from the terminal, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that the obstruction is detected, or the rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling Including the second request information, the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
终端在检测到遮挡或检测到终端旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送上行信令。该上行信令中可以携带该第二请求信息,这样终端避免了专门发送该第二请求信息,而是复用已有信令,从而减少了信令开销。The terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal. The uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自该终端的第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: receiving first request information from the terminal, where the first request information is used to request to enter a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
终端在检测到遮挡(即终端和网络设备之间存在遮挡物),或检测到终端自身发生了旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第一请求信息以请求接入第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在确定当前的上行传输模式不合适的情况下,可以请求新的上行传输模式(即第一上行传输模式),从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。When the terminal detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, the terminal may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收来自该终端的第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;和/或接收来自该终端的第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。In some possible implementations, the method further includes: receiving third request information from the terminal, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or receiving fourth request information from the terminal, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
终端在检测到MPE问题消失的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第三请求信息以请求恢复第二上行传输模式。这样终端可以灵活的在第一上行传输模式和第二上行传输模式之间进行切换,从而有助于更进一步提高上行传输的灵活性。When detecting that the MPE problem disappears, the terminal may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:接收能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端 支持第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。In some possible implementations, the method further includes: receiving capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and a preset Different transmission modes of the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
终端可以提前向网络设备上报自己是否支持该第一上行传输模式。例如,在该能力信息支持该第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备才会向终端发送上述指示信息。这样避免了在终端不支持第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备依然为该终端配置开启第一上行传输模式造成信令或资源的浪费。The terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal. In this way, when the terminal does not support the first uplink transmission mode, the network device still configures the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode to cause a waste of signaling or resources.
第五方面,提供了一种用于上行传输的装置,该装置可以是终端,也可以是终端内的芯片。该装置具有实现上述第一方面或第三方面,及各种可能的实现方式的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fifth aspect, a device for uplink transmission is provided. The device may be a terminal or a chip in the terminal. The device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned first aspect or third aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置包括:收发模块。可选地,该装置还可以包括处理模块。该收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块。所述收发模块例如可以是收发器、接收器、发射器中的至少一种,该收发模块可以包括射频电路或天线。该处理模块可以是处理器。可选地,所述装置还包括存储模块,该存储模块例如可以是存储器。当包括存储模块时,该存储模块用于存储指令。该处理模块与该存储模块连接,该处理模块可以执行该存储模块存储的指令或源自其他的指令,以使该装置执行上述第一方面或第三方面,及各种可能的实现方式的通信方法。在本设计中,该装置可以为终端。In one possible design, the device includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the device may also include a processing module. The transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module. The transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the transceiver module may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna. The processing module may be a processor. Optionally, the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be, for example, a memory. When a storage module is included, the storage module is used to store instructions. The processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute the instructions stored in the storage module or from other instructions, so that the device executes the above-mentioned first aspect or third aspect, and various possible implementation modes of communication method. In this design, the device can be a terminal.
在另一种可能的设计中,当该装置为芯片时,该芯片包括:收发模块。可选地,该装置还可以包括处理模块,该收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块。收发模块例如可以是该芯片上的输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。处理模块例如可以是处理器。该处理模块可执行指令,以使该终端内的芯片执行上述第一方面或第三方面,以及任意可能的实现的通信方法。可选地,该处理模块可以执行存储模块中的指令,该存储模块可以为芯片内的存储模块,如寄存器、缓存等。该存储模块还可以是位于通信设备内,但位于芯片外部,如只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)等。In another possible design, when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the device may further include a processing module, and the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module. The transceiver module may be an input/output interface, pin or circuit on the chip, for example. The processing module may be a processor, for example. The processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the terminal executes the first aspect or the third aspect, and any possible implementation communication method. Optionally, the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like. The storage module can also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (random access memory) memory, RAM) etc.
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个通用中央处理器(CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制上述各方面通信方法的程序执行的集成电路。Among them, the processor mentioned in any of the above can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more for controlling the above All aspects of communication method program execution integrated circuit.
第六方面,提供了一种用于上行传输的装置,该装置可以是网络设备,也可以是网络设备内的芯片。该装置具有实现上述第二方面或第四方面,及各种可能的实现方式的功能。该功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a sixth aspect, a device for uplink transmission is provided. The device may be a network device or a chip in the network device. The device has the function of realizing the above-mentioned second aspect or fourth aspect and various possible implementation manners. This function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置包括:收发模块。可选地,该装置还可以包括处理模块,该收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块。所述收发模块例如可以是收发器、接收器、发射器中的至少一种,该收发模块可以包括射频电路或天线。该处理模块可以是处理器。In one possible design, the device includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the device may further include a processing module, and the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module. The transceiver module may be, for example, at least one of a transceiver, a receiver, and a transmitter, and the transceiver module may include a radio frequency circuit or an antenna. The processing module may be a processor.
可选地,所述装置还包括存储模块,该存储模块例如可以是存储器。当包括存储模块时,该存储模块用于存储指令。该处理模块与该存储模块连接,该处理模块可以执行该存储模块存储的指令或源自其他的指令,以使该装置执行上述第二方面或第四方面,或其任意一项的方法。Optionally, the device further includes a storage module, and the storage module may be a memory, for example. When a storage module is included, the storage module is used to store instructions. The processing module is connected to the storage module, and the processing module can execute instructions stored in the storage module or instructions derived from other sources, so that the device executes the above-mentioned second aspect or fourth aspect, or any one of the methods thereof.
在另一种可能的设计中,当该装置为芯片时,该芯片包括:收发模块。可选地,该装置还可以包括处理模块,该收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块。所述收发模块例如可以是该芯片上的输入/输出接口、管脚或电路等。处理模块例如可以是处理器。该处理模块可执行指令,以使该网络设备内的芯片执行上述第二方面或第四方面,以及任意可能的实现的通信方法。In another possible design, when the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver module. Optionally, the device may further include a processing module, and the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a sending module. The transceiver module may be an input/output interface, pin or circuit on the chip, for example. The processing module may be a processor, for example. The processing module can execute instructions so that the chip in the network device executes the second aspect or the fourth aspect, and any possible implementation communication method.
可选地,该处理模块可以执行存储模块中的指令,该存储模块可以为芯片内的存储模块,如寄存器、缓存等。该存储模块还可以是位于通信设备内,但位于芯片外部,如ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,RAM等。Optionally, the processing module may execute instructions in the storage module, and the storage module may be a storage module in the chip, such as a register, a cache, and the like. The storage module may also be located in the communication device but outside the chip, such as ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, etc.
其中,上述任一处提到的处理器,可以是一个CPU,微处理器,特定应用集成电路ASIC,或一个或多个用于控制上述各方面通信方法的程序执行的集成电路。Wherein, the processor mentioned in any of the above may be a CPU, a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit ASIC, or one or more integrated circuits used to control the execution of the programs of the above-mentioned various aspects of the communication method.
第七方面,提供了一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有程序代码,该程序代码用于指示执行上述第一方面或第三方面,及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In a seventh aspect, a computer storage medium is provided, and program code is stored in the computer storage medium, and the program code is used to instruct instructions to execute the method in the first aspect or the third aspect, and any possible implementation manners thereof .
第八方面,提供了一种计算机存储介质,该计算机存储介质中存储有程序代码,该程序代码用于指示执行上述第二方面或第四方面,及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In an eighth aspect, a computer storage medium is provided, and program code is stored in the computer storage medium, and the program code is used to instruct instructions to execute the method in the second aspect or the fourth aspect, and any possible implementation manners thereof .
第九方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面或第三方面,或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method in the first aspect or the third aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
第十方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第二方面或第四方面,或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which when running on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method in the second aspect or the fourth aspect, or any possible implementation manner thereof.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括上述第五方面所述的装置和上述第六方面所述的装置。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided. The communication system includes the device described in the fifth aspect and the device described in the sixth aspect.
基于上述技术方案,终端接收网络设备发送的多个参考信号,并测量该多个参考信号的信号质量,从而从该多个参考信号中选择一个参考信号(即第二参考信号)对应的波束作为下行波束。此外,终端还可以在该测量报告中指示该多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束。换句话说,终端可以寻找两个波束上报给网络设备,一个用于下行传输,一个用于上行传输。这样在终端不满足波束一致性的情况下,可以提前找到备份上行波束,以使得网络设备能够准确的接收到上行信号,避免了重新进行上行波束训练寻找上行波束,从而提高了上行波束的通信效率。Based on the above technical solution, the terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals, thereby selecting a beam corresponding to a reference signal (ie, the second reference signal) from the multiple reference signals as Downlink beam. In addition, the terminal may also indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals in the measurement report. In other words, the terminal can find two beams to report to the network device, one for downlink transmission and one for uplink transmission. In this way, when the terminal does not meet the beam consistency, the backup uplink beam can be found in advance, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal, avoiding the uplink beam training to find the uplink beam again, thereby improving the communication efficiency of the uplink beam .
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是本申请一个通信系统的示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system of the present application;
图2是传统方案中上行传输的方法的示意性流程图;Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of an uplink transmission method in a traditional scheme;
图3是本申请一个实施例的用于上行传输的方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请一个实施例的用于上行传输的方法的示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请另一个实施例的用于上行传输的方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to another embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请又一个实施例的用于上行传输的方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to another embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请一个实施例的用于上行传输的装置的示意性框图;FIG. 7 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请一个实施例的传输随机接入前导的装置的示意性结构图;FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请另一个实施例的传输随机接入前导的装置的示意性框图;FIG. 9 is a schematic block diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请另一个实施例的传输随机接入前导的装置的示意性结构图;FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请另一个具体实施例的传输随机接入前导的装置的示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请另一个具体实施例的传输随机接入前导的装置的示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请另一个具体实施例的传输随机接入前导的装置的示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请另一个具体实施例的传输随机接入前导的装置的示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of an apparatus for transmitting a random access preamble according to another specific embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: global system for mobile communications (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, broadband code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, the future fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (NR), etc.
本申请实施例中的终端可以指用户设备、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端设备、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal in the embodiments of the present application may refer to user equipment, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, terminal device, wireless communication device, user agent, or User device. The terminal can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), and a wireless communication function Handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, terminals in the future 5G network or terminals in the future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc. This embodiment of the present application does not limit this.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端通信的设备,该网络设备可以是全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统或码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)中的基站(base transceiver station,BTS),也可以是宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统中的基站(NodeB,NB),还可以是LTE系统中的演进型基站(evoled NodeB,eNB或eNodeB),还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该网络设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备以及未来5G网络中的网络设备或者未来演进的PLMN网络中的网络设备,5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等,本申请实施例并不限定。The network equipment in the embodiments of the present application may be equipment used to communicate with terminals. The network equipment may be a global system for mobile communications (GSM) system or code division multiple access (CDMA). The base transceiver station (BTS) can also be a base station (NodeB, NB) in a wideband code division multiple access (WCDMA) system, or an evolved base station (evoled NodeB) in an LTE system. , ENB or eNodeB), it can also be a wireless controller in a cloud radio access network (CRAN) scenario, or the network device can be a relay station, an access point, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and the future 5G The network equipment in the network or the network equipment in the PLMN network that will evolve in the future, one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point, For example, a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), etc., are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功 能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). The CU implements some of the functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some of the functions of the gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for handling non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer functions. The DU is responsible for processing the physical layer protocol and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (RLC) layer, the media access control (MAC) layer, and the physical (PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU , Or, sent by DU+AAU. It can be understood that the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), and the CU can also be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
在本申请实施例中,终端或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且,本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端或网络设备,或者,是终端或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. The hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and memory (also referred to as main memory). The operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through processes, for example, Linux operating systems, Unix operating systems, Android operating systems, iOS operating systems, or windows operating systems. The application layer includes applications such as browsers, address books, word processing software, and instant messaging software. Moreover, the embodiments of the application do not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided in the embodiments of the application, as long as the program that records the codes of the methods provided in the embodiments of the application can be provided in accordance with the embodiments of the application. For example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application may be a terminal or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal or network device that can call and execute the program.
另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatile disc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices, or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "article of manufacture" used in this application encompasses a computer program accessible from any computer-readable device, carrier, or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (for example, hard disks, floppy disks, or tapes, etc.), optical disks (for example, compact discs (CD), digital versatile discs (DVD)) Etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (for example, erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing, and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
图1是本申请一个通信系统的示意图。图1中的通信系统可以包括至少一个终端(例如终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40、终端50和终端60)和网络设备70。网络设备70用于为终端提供通信服务并接入核心网,终端可以通过搜索网络设备70发送的同步信号、广播信号等接入网络,从而进行与网络的通信。图1中的终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40和终端60可以与网络设备70进行上下行传输。例如,网络设备70可以向终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40和终端60发送下行信号,也可以接收终端10、终端20、终端30、终端40和终端60发送的上行信号。Fig. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system of the present application. The communication system in FIG. 1 may include at least one terminal (for example, the terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, the terminal 50, and the terminal 60) and a network device 70. The network device 70 is used to provide communication services for the terminal and access the core network. The terminal can access the network by searching for synchronization signals, broadcast signals, etc. sent by the network device 70, so as to communicate with the network. The terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, and the terminal 60 in FIG. 1 can perform uplink and downlink transmissions with the network device 70. For example, the network device 70 may send downlink signals to the terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, and the terminal 60, and may also receive the uplink signal sent by the terminal 10, the terminal 20, the terminal 30, the terminal 40, and the terminal 60.
此外,终端40、终端50和终端60也可以看作一个通信系统,终端60可以向终端40和终端50发送下行信号,也可以接收终端40和终端50发送的上行信号。In addition, the terminal 40, the terminal 50, and the terminal 60 can also be regarded as a communication system, and the terminal 60 can send downlink signals to the terminal 40 and the terminal 50, and can also receive uplink signals sent by the terminal 40 and the terminal 50.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例可以应用于包括一个或多个网络设备的通信系统中,也可以应用于包括一个或多个终端的通信系统中,本申请对此不进行限定。It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application may be applied to a communication system including one or more network devices, and may also be applied to a communication system including one or more terminals, which is not limited in the present application.
应理解,该通信系统中包括的网络设备可以是一个或多个。一个网络设备可以向一个或多个终端发送数据或控制信令。多个网络设备也可以同时向一个或多个终端发送数据或 控制信令。It should be understood that there may be one or more network devices included in the communication system. A network device can send data or control signaling to one or more terminals. Multiple network devices can also send data or control signaling to one or more terminals at the same time.
下面将本申请涉及到的术语进行详细的介绍:The terms involved in this application are described in detail below:
1、波束(beam):1. Beam:
波束在NR协议中的体现可以是空域滤波器(spatial domain filter),或者称空间滤波器(spatial filter)或空间参数(spatial parameter)。用于发送信号的波束可以称为发送波束(transmission beam,Tx beam),可以称为空域发送滤波器(spatial domain transmission filter)或空间发射参数(spatial transmission parameter);用于接收信号的波束可以称为接收波束(reception beam,Rx beam),可以称为空域接收滤波器(spatial domain receive filter)或空间接收参数(spatial RX parameter)。The embodiment of the beam in the NR protocol can be a spatial domain filter, or a spatial filter or a spatial parameter. The beam used to transmit a signal can be called a transmission beam (Tx beam), can be called a spatial domain transmission filter or a spatial transmission parameter (spatial transmission parameter); the beam used to receive a signal can be called To receive the beam (reception beam, Rx beam), it can be called a spatial domain receive filter or a spatial receive parameter (spatial RX parameter).
发送波束可以是指信号经天线发射出去后在空间不同方向上形成的信号强度的分布,接收波束可以是指从天线上接收到的无线信号在空间不同方向上的信号强度分布。The transmitting beam may refer to the distribution of signal strength in different directions in space after a signal is transmitted through the antenna, and the receiving beam may refer to the signal strength distribution of the wireless signal received from the antenna in different directions in space.
此外,波束可以是宽波束,或者窄波束,或者其他类型波束。形成波束的技术可以是波束赋形技术或者其他技术。波束赋形技术具体可以为数字波束赋形技术、模拟波束赋形技术或者混合数字/模拟波束赋形技术等。In addition, the beam may be a wide beam, or a narrow beam, or other types of beams. The beam forming technology may be beamforming technology or other technologies. The beamforming technology may specifically be a digital beamforming technology, an analog beamforming technology, or a hybrid digital/analog beamforming technology, etc.
波束一般和资源对应,例如进行波束测量时,网络设备通过不同的资源来测量不同的波束,终端反馈测得的资源质量,网络设备就知道对应的波束的质量。在数据传输时,波束信息也是通过其对应的资源来进行指示的。例如网络设备通过下行控制信息(down link control information,DCI)中的传输配置指示(transmission configuration indication,TCI)资源,来指示终端物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)波束的信息。Beams generally correspond to resources. For example, when performing beam measurement, network equipment uses different resources to measure different beams, and the terminal feeds back the measured resource quality, and the network equipment knows the quality of the corresponding beam. During data transmission, the beam information is also indicated by its corresponding resource. For example, the network device instructs the terminal's physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) beam information through the transmission configuration indication (TCI) resource in the downlink control information (DCI).
可选地,将具有相同或者类似的通信特征的多个波束视为是一个波束。一个波束内可以包括一个或多个天线端口,用于传输数据信道、控制信道和探测信号等。形成一个波束的一个或多个天线端口也可以看作是一个天线端口集。Optionally, multiple beams having the same or similar communication characteristics are regarded as one beam. One or more antenna ports can be included in one beam, which are used to transmit data channels, control channels, and sounding signals. One or more antenna ports forming a beam can also be regarded as an antenna port set.
在波束测量中,网络设备的每一个波束对应一个资源,因此可以以资源的索引来唯一标识该资源对应的波束。In beam measurement, each beam of the network device corresponds to a resource, so the resource index can be used to uniquely identify the beam corresponding to the resource.
2、资源:2. Resources:
在波束测量中,可以通过资源的索引来唯一标识该资源对应的波束。资源可以是上行信号资源,也可以是下行信号资源。上行信号包括但不限于探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS),解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)。下行信号包括但不限于:信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)、小区专用参考信号(cell specific reference signal,CS-RS)、UE专用参考信号(user equipment specific reference signal,US-RS)、解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)、以及同步信号/物理广播信道块(synchronization system/physical broadcast channel block,SS/PBCH block)。其中,SS/PBCH block可以简称为同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)。In beam measurement, the resource index can be used to uniquely identify the beam corresponding to the resource. The resource can be an uplink signal resource or a downlink signal resource. Uplink signals include but are not limited to sounding reference signal (SRS) and demodulation reference signal (DMRS). Downlink signals include but are not limited to: channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS), cell specific reference signal (CS-RS), UE specific reference signal (user equipment specific reference signal, US-RS), demodulation reference signal (demodulation reference signal, DMRS), and synchronization signal/physical broadcast channel block (synchronization system/physical broadcast channel block, SS/PBCH block). Among them, the SS/PBCH block may be referred to as a synchronization signal block (synchronization signal block, SSB) for short.
资源通过无线资源控制信令(radio resource control,RRC)信令配置。在配置结构上,一个资源是一个数据结构,包括其对应的上行/下行信号的相关参数,例如上行/下行信号的类型,承载上行/下行信号的资源粒,上行/下行信号的发送时间和周期,发送上行/下行信号所采用的端口数等。每一个上行/下行信号的资源具有唯一的索引,以标识该下行信 号的资源。可以理解的是,资源的索引也可以称为资源的标识,本申请实施例对此不作任何限制。Resources are configured through radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) signaling. In terms of configuration structure, a resource is a data structure, including its corresponding uplink/downlink signal related parameters, such as the type of uplink/downlink signal, the resource element that carries the uplink/downlink signal, the transmission time and period of the uplink/downlink signal , The number of ports used to send uplink/downlink signals, etc. Each uplink/downlink signal resource has a unique index to identify the downlink signal resource. It is understandable that the index of the resource may also be referred to as the identifier of the resource, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
3、载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA):3. Carrier aggregation (CA):
CA可以将两个或多个成员载波(component carrier,CC))聚合在一起,实现更大的传输带宽,有效提高上下行传输速率。CA可以支持带内连续载波聚合、带内不连续载波聚合或带间不连续载波聚合等。其中,成员载波也可以称为载波分量(carrier component,CC)。CA can aggregate two or more component carriers (CC) to achieve a larger transmission bandwidth and effectively increase the uplink and downlink transmission rates. CA can support in-band continuous carrier aggregation, in-band discontinuous carrier aggregation, or inter-band discontinuous carrier aggregation. Among them, the component carrier may also be referred to as a carrier component (CC).
可以理解的是,本申请实施例可以应用于多载波或CA场景中。It is understandable that the embodiments of the present application can be applied in a multi-carrier or CA scenario.
4、终端波束一致性(beam correspondence):4. Terminal beam correspondence:
在终端能够形成多个波束的情况下,波束一致性是指终端能够根据下行接收波束找到上行发送波束,或者根据上行发送波束找到下行接收波束。例如,终端可以将接收下行信号的波束作为上行传输的上行发送波束。In the case that the terminal can form multiple beams, beam consistency means that the terminal can find the uplink transmission beam according to the downlink reception beam, or find the downlink reception beam according to the uplink transmission beam. For example, the terminal may use the beam for receiving the downlink signal as the uplink transmission beam for uplink transmission.
其中,终端根据下行接收波束找到上行发送波束的方式可以称为“默认上行传输模式”。Among them, the manner in which the terminal finds the uplink transmission beam according to the downlink reception beam may be referred to as the "default uplink transmission mode".
5、最大曝露允许值(maximum permissible exposure,MPE):5. Maximum permissible exposure (MPE):
移动电话在使用时,由于移动电话的发射天线会相当靠近于人体的脑部或其他部分,可能会放射出过高的电磁能辐射。因此,终端可以通过比吸收率(specific absorption rate,SAR)的量测来确保不会有过多的电磁能辐射,从而保障人体使用移动电话的安全性。此外,除了SAR标准外,由电磁理论的推演,安全标准还可以通过MPE表示。其中,MPE具体以电磁场的场量或功率密度(power density,PD)来表示。When the mobile phone is in use, because the transmitting antenna of the mobile phone is quite close to the brain or other parts of the human body, excessive electromagnetic energy radiation may be emitted. Therefore, the terminal can use specific absorption rate (SAR) measurement to ensure that there will be no excessive electromagnetic energy radiation, thereby ensuring the safety of the human body using the mobile phone. In addition, in addition to the SAR standard, derived from electromagnetic theory, the safety standard can also be expressed by MPE. Among them, MPE is specifically expressed by the amount of electromagnetic field or power density (PD).
其中,MPE安全值的制定是以无论在何种曝露条件下,皆不可使其相对应的SAR值超过其限制规定。例如,在高频频段(>6GHz),安全标准通常用MPE来表示,联邦通信委员会(federal communications commission,FCC)MPE限制为11毫瓦/平方厘米(mW/cm 2)。其中,辐射强度受发送功率和发送天线增益的共同影响。辐射强度的估计允许做时域平均,平均时间从2s到6min不等。 Among them, the MPE safety value is formulated so that the corresponding SAR value cannot exceed its limit under any exposure conditions. For example, in the high frequency band (>6GHz), the safety standard is usually expressed by MPE, and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) MPE is limited to 11 milliwatts per square centimeter (mW/cm 2 ). Among them, the radiation intensity is jointly affected by the transmission power and the transmission antenna gain. The estimation of radiation intensity allows time domain averaging, and the average time ranges from 2s to 6min.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,可以通过‘MPE问题’或者‘MPE风险’表示终端发送的信号造成的辐射强度超过MPE。为方便描述,下述实施例以“MPE问题”为例进行说明,但本申请并不限于此。It should be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, the "MPE problem" or the "MPE risk" may be used to indicate that the radiation intensity caused by the signal sent by the terminal exceeds the MPE. For the convenience of description, the following embodiments take the "MPE problem" as an example for description, but the application is not limited to this.
6、上行传输:6. Uplink transmission:
本申请实施例中的上行传输可以是指上行数据信道(physical uplink shared channel,PUSCH)的传输,上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH)的传输,或上行探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)的传输。具体地,网络设备可以通过DCI格式0 0调度PUSCH,并通过enableDefaultBeamPlForPUSCH0_0开启默认上行传输模式,即终端使用下行控制信道的接收波束作为PUSCH的发送波束,使用下行控制信道对应的参考信号作为发送PUSCH的路损估计参考信号。网络设备也可以通过enableDefaultBeamPlForPUCCH开启默认上行传输模式,即终端使用下行控制信道的接收波束作为PUCCH的发送波束,使用下行控制信道对应的参考信号作为发送PUCCH的路损估计参考信号。网络设备还可以通过enableDefaultBeamPlForSRS开启默认上行传输模式,即终端使用下行控制信道的接收波束作为SRS的发送波束,使用下行控制信道对应 的参考信号作为发送SRS的路损估计参考信号。The uplink transmission in the embodiment of this application may refer to the transmission of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), the transmission of the uplink control channel (physical uplink control channel, PUCCH), or the uplink sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS). ) Transmission. Specifically, the network device can schedule PUSCH through DCI format 0, and enable the default uplink transmission mode through enableDefaultBeamPlForPUSCH0_0, that is, the terminal uses the receive beam of the downlink control channel as the PUSCH transmit beam, and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel is used as the PUSCH transmit beam. Path loss estimation reference signal. The network device can also enable the default uplink transmission mode through enableDefaultBeamPlForPUCCH, that is, the terminal uses the receiving beam of the downlink control channel as the PUCCH sending beam, and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel is used as the path loss estimation reference signal for sending the PUCCH. The network device can also enable the default uplink transmission mode through enableDefaultBeamPlForSRS, that is, the terminal uses the receiving beam of the downlink control channel as the sending beam of the SRS, and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel is used as the path loss estimation reference signal for sending the SRS.
可以理解的是,下行控制信道的接收波束以及下行控制信道对应的参考信号,可以是协议规定的。It is understandable that the receiving beam of the downlink control channel and the reference signal corresponding to the downlink control channel may be stipulated by the protocol.
需要说明的是,随着技术的不断发展,本申请实施例的术语有可能发生变化,但都在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that with the continuous development of technology, the terminology of the embodiments of this application may change, but they are all within the protection scope of this application.
如图2示出了传统方案中上行传输的方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 2 shows a schematic flowchart of an uplink transmission method in a traditional solution.
201,终端向网络设备发送能力信息。201: The terminal sends capability information to a network device.
具体地,该能力信息用于指示终端是否具有波束一致性或终端是否需要通过上行波束扫描才能获得波束一致性。此外,该能力信息还可以包括终端是否支持默认上行传输模式。其中,默认上行传输模式具体可以是PUSCH的默认传输模式、PUCCH的默认传输模式或SRS的默认传输模式中的至少一项。Specifically, the capability information is used to indicate whether the terminal has beam consistency or whether the terminal needs to pass uplink beam scanning to obtain beam consistency. In addition, the capability information may also include whether the terminal supports the default uplink transmission mode. The default uplink transmission mode may specifically be at least one of the default transmission mode of PUSCH, the default transmission mode of PUCCH, or the default transmission mode of SRS.
202,该网络设备向该终端发送配置信息,该配置信息用于指示波束训练的相关配置。202. The network device sends configuration information to the terminal, where the configuration information is used to indicate related configurations for beam training.
具体地,该配置信息可以用于配置下行传输的资源。Specifically, the configuration information can be used to configure downlink transmission resources.
可以理解的是,该配置信息还可以用于配置该终端开启默认上行传输模式。It is understandable that the configuration information can also be used to configure the terminal to enable the default uplink transmission mode.
203,该网络设备向该终端发送多个参考信号。203. The network device sends multiple reference signals to the terminal.
204,该终端对该多个参考信号进行测量。204. The terminal measures the multiple reference signals.
205,该终端向该网络设备发送测量报告,该测量报告用于指示选中的下行波束。205. The terminal sends a measurement report to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the selected downlink beam.
206,该网络设备还可以向该终端发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示该终端更新下行控制信道的接收波束。206. The network device may also send instruction information to the terminal, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to update the receive beam of the downlink control channel.
207,该终端根据该默认上行传输模式确定出上行波束,并采用上行波束向网络设备发送上行信号。207. The terminal determines an uplink beam according to the default uplink transmission mode, and uses the uplink beam to send an uplink signal to the network device.
也就是说,传统方案中,为了降低上行波束管理的开销和时延,定义了多种默认上行传输模式。对于具有波束一致性的终端,上行发送波束可以直接参考下行波束。这样如果出现下行波束的切换,则网络设备只需要发送下行波束切换的信令,终端即可自动跟随下行波束的切换,更新自己的上行发送波束和发送功率,而不需要网络设备专门发送信令进行通知上行发送波束的切换。上述R16方案的一个基本前提是终端具有波束一致性。但是,在实际通信中,终端的波束一致性并不一定成立。That is to say, in the traditional scheme, in order to reduce the overhead and delay of uplink beam management, multiple default uplink transmission modes are defined. For terminals with beam consistency, the uplink transmission beam can directly refer to the downlink beam. In this way, if there is a downlink beam switching, the network equipment only needs to send downlink beam switching signaling, and the terminal can automatically follow the downlink beam switching and update its own uplink transmission beam and transmission power, without the need for the network equipment to specifically send signaling Perform the switching of the notification uplink transmission beam. A basic premise of the above-mentioned R16 scheme is that the terminal has beam consistency. However, in actual communication, the beam consistency of the terminal is not necessarily established.
例如,由于终端的能力弱,出厂时没有进行收发通道校准,导致接收波束和发送波束的方向不完全一致,甚至有较大的偏差。For example, due to the weak capabilities of the terminal, the receiving and sending channel calibration is not performed when leaving the factory, resulting in the directions of the receiving beam and the sending beam not being completely consistent, or even large deviations.
再例如,终端在正常情况下支持波束一致性,但在某些情况下需要临时区分上下行波束的情况。一种情况为:上行发送波束方向朝向人体,导致出现MPE问题。由于人体遮挡,会对人体造成一定的损伤。终端为了将上行信号的辐射强度降低到人体的安全范围内,可通过降低上行信号的发送功率来实现,会造成下行波束可接收下行信号,但该下行波束对应的上行发送波束发送的上行信号无法到达网络设备的情况,即波束一致性临时被破坏。另一种情况为:终端接收下行控制信道到进行上行传输的过程中终端自身出现了移动或旋转,使得波束一致性临时被破坏。For another example, the terminal supports beam consistency under normal conditions, but needs to temporarily distinguish the uplink and downlink beam conditions in some cases. One situation is: the direction of the uplink transmission beam is toward the human body, which causes the MPE problem. Because the human body is blocked, it will cause certain damage to the human body. In order for the terminal to reduce the radiation intensity of the uplink signal to the safe range of the human body, it can be achieved by reducing the transmission power of the uplink signal, which will cause the downlink beam to receive the downlink signal, but the uplink signal sent by the uplink transmission beam corresponding to the downlink beam cannot be transmitted. When reaching the network device, the beam consistency is temporarily destroyed. Another situation is that the terminal moves or rotates during the process from receiving the downlink control channel to performing uplink transmission, so that the beam consistency is temporarily destroyed.
因此,在终端不支持波束一致的情况下,或者在支持波束一致但临时波束不一致的情况下,终端如何进行上行传输亟待解决。Therefore, in the case that the terminal does not support beam consistency, or in the case of supporting beam consistency but temporary beam inconsistency, how the terminal performs uplink transmission needs to be solved urgently.
图3示出了本申请一个实施例的用于上行传输的方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 3 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
301,终端接收来自网络设备的多个参考信号。相应地,网络设备向终端发送该多个参考信号。301. The terminal receives multiple reference signals from a network device. Correspondingly, the network device sends the multiple reference signals to the terminal.
302,该终端向该网络设备发送测量该多个参考信号的测量报告,该测量报告用于指示该多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,以及用于指示该多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。相应地,网络设备接收该测量报告。302. The terminal sends a measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and is used to indicate the multiple reference signals The downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal in. Correspondingly, the network device receives the measurement report.
具体地,终端接收网络设备发送的多个参考信号,并测量该多个参考信号的信号质量,从而从该多个参考信号中选择一个参考信号(即第二参考信号)对应的波束作为下行波束。此外,终端还可以在该测量报告中指示该多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束。换句话说,终端可以寻找两个波束上报给网络设备,一个用于下行传输,一个用于上行传输。这样在终端不满足波束一致性的情况下,可以提前找到备份上行波束,以使得网络设备能够准确的接收到上行信号,避免了重新进行上行波束训练寻找上行波束,从而提高了上行波束的通信效率。Specifically, the terminal receives multiple reference signals sent by the network device, and measures the signal quality of the multiple reference signals, thereby selecting a beam corresponding to a reference signal (that is, the second reference signal) from the multiple reference signals as the downlink beam . In addition, the terminal may also indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals in the measurement report. In other words, the terminal can find two beams to report to the network device, one for downlink transmission and one for uplink transmission. In this way, when the terminal does not meet the beam consistency, the backup uplink beam can be found in advance, so that the network equipment can accurately receive the uplink signal, avoiding the uplink beam training to find the uplink beam again, thereby improving the communication efficiency of the uplink beam .
需要说明的是,终端和网络设备可以约定测量报告指示的上行波束用于作为终端的备份上行波束。或者,该测量报告可以直接指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束用于作为中的备份上行波束。It should be noted that the terminal and the network device may agree that the uplink beam indicated by the measurement report is used as the backup uplink beam of the terminal. Alternatively, the measurement report may directly indicate that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is used as the backup uplink beam in the middle.
可以理解的是,终端可以根据信号质量选择该第二参考信号。例如,该第二参考信号的信号质量满足预设质量需求,更具体地,该第二参考信号的信号质量为该多个参考信号中信号质量最佳的参考信号。It is understandable that the terminal may select the second reference signal according to the signal quality. For example, the signal quality of the second reference signal meets a preset quality requirement, and more specifically, the signal quality of the second reference signal is a reference signal with the best signal quality among the multiple reference signals.
还可以理解的是,终端也可以是根据信号质量选择该第一参考信号。例如,该第一参考信号满足一定的质量需求,更具体地,该第一参考信号可以是从多个参考信号中选择除该第二参考信号之外的信号质量最佳的参考信号。It can also be understood that the terminal may also select the first reference signal according to the signal quality. For example, the first reference signal satisfies a certain quality requirement. More specifically, the first reference signal may be a reference signal with the best signal quality other than the second reference signal selected from a plurality of reference signals.
还可以理解的是,本申请实施例中的上行波束可以为一个波束对链路(beam pair link),即该上行波束对链路包括终端发送上行信号的发送波束,和网络设备接收该上行信号的接收波束组成的通信链路。It can also be understood that the uplink beam in the embodiment of the present application may be a beam pair link, that is, the uplink beam pair link includes the transmission beam for the terminal to send the uplink signal, and the network device receives the uplink signal A communication link composed of the receive beams.
例如,如图4所示,在下行通信中,网络设备采用波束1和波束2分别发送参考信号,终端采用波束3、波束4和波束5接收参考信号。终端检测到采用波束3接收到波束2发送的参考信号的信号质量最佳(即将波束3和波束2作为下行波束对链路),而在上行通信中可以将波束1和波束5作为备份上行波束对链路。终端通过测量上报通知网络设备第一参考信号(波束1)和第二参考信号(波束2)的信息。这样网络设备可以将波束2作为该终端的服务波束,并通过该波束2进行下行传输,相应地,终端采用波束3接收到下行信号。终端在采用波束3接收到该下行信号之后,采用波束5发送上行信号,相应地,网络设备采用波束1接收该上行信号。For example, as shown in FIG. 4, in downlink communication, the network device uses beam 1 and beam 2 to send reference signals, respectively, and the terminal uses beam 3, beam 4, and beam 5 to receive reference signals. The terminal detects that the signal quality of the reference signal sent by the beam 2 received by the beam 3 is the best (that is, beam 3 and beam 2 are used as the downlink beam pair link), and beam 1 and beam 5 can be used as backup uplink beams in uplink communication On the link. The terminal informs the network device of the information of the first reference signal (beam 1) and the second reference signal (beam 2) through measurement reports. In this way, the network device can use the beam 2 as the serving beam of the terminal, and perform downlink transmission through the beam 2, and accordingly, the terminal uses the beam 3 to receive the downlink signal. After receiving the downlink signal by using the beam 3, the terminal uses the beam 5 to send the uplink signal. Accordingly, the network device uses the beam 1 to receive the uplink signal.
需要说明的是,为了描述方便,下面不单独描述接收波束或者发送波束。在本申请中波束1和波束2是网络设备的波束,在上行通信中指网络设备的接收波束,在下行通信中指网络设备的发送波束。同样的,波束3、波束4和波束5是终端的波束,在上行通信中指终端的发送波束,在下行通信中指终端的接收波束。It should be noted that, for the convenience of description, the receiving beam or the sending beam is not separately described below. In this application, the beam 1 and the beam 2 are the beams of the network device. In the uplink communication, it refers to the receiving beam of the network device, and in the downlink communication, it refers to the transmitting beam of the network device. Similarly, beam 3, beam 4, and beam 5 are the beams of the terminal. In uplink communication, they refer to the terminal's transmitting beam, and in downlink communication, they refer to the terminal's receiving beam.
还可以理解的是,该测量报告还可以包括该第一参考信号的信号质量,或者该第二参考信号的信号质量。It is also understandable that the measurement report may also include the signal quality of the first reference signal or the signal quality of the second reference signal.
可选地,该测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,该第一参考信号信 息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,该第二参考信号信息用于指示该第二参考信号对应的下行波束。Optionally, the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used to indicate the second reference signal. 2. Downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
具体地,第一参考信号对应的上行波束可以是通过第一参考信号信息指示的,第二参考信号对应的下行波束可以是通过第二参考信号信息指示的。例如,该第一参考信号信息为该第一参考信号的信号标识或该第一参考信号的资源标识。该第二参考信号信息为该第二参考信号的信号标识或该第二参考信号的资源标识。Specifically, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be indicated by the first reference signal information, and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal may be indicated by the second reference signal information. For example, the first reference signal information is the signal identifier of the first reference signal or the resource identifier of the first reference signal. The second reference signal information is the signal identifier of the second reference signal or the resource identifier of the second reference signal.
可以理解的是,第一参考信号或第二参考信号的信号标识可以是参考信号的编号。或者第一参考信号的资源标识可以是该第一参考信号对应的资源的标识。相应地,第二参考信号的资源标识可以是该第二参考信号对应的资源的标识。It can be understood that the signal identifier of the first reference signal or the second reference signal may be the reference signal number. Or the resource identifier of the first reference signal may be the identifier of the resource corresponding to the first reference signal. Correspondingly, the resource identifier of the second reference signal may be the identifier of the resource corresponding to the second reference signal.
例如,如表1示出了本申请实施例的第二参考信号的资源标识(例如,CSI-RS resource#a、CSI-RS resource#b、CSI-RS resource#c、CSI-RS resource#d)、下行波束(BS TX和UE RX)以及测量报告之间的关系。For example, Table 1 shows the resource identifier of the second reference signal in the embodiment of this application (for example, CSI-RS resource#a, CSI-RS resource#b, CSI-RS resource#c, CSI-RS resource#d ), the relationship between downlink beams (BS TX and UE RX) and measurement reports.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2020079291-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2020079291-appb-000001
需要说明的是,为了服务波束方便切换,网络设备和终端之间可以建立多组这样的关系,例如,(CSI-RS resource#c,CSI-RS resource#d)具有关联关系,其中CSI-RS resource#c是下行通信的参考,CSI-RS resource#d是上行通信的参考;(CSI-RS resource#a,CSI-RS resource#b)具有关联关系,其中CSI-RS resource#a是下行通信的参考,CSI-RS resource#b是上行通信的参考。这样,在下行通信的波束从CSI-RS resource#a切换到CSI-RS resource#c时,上行通信的波束也从CSI-RS resource#b切换到了CSI-RS resource#d。It should be noted that in order to facilitate the switching of service beams, multiple sets of such relationships can be established between network devices and terminals. For example, (CSI-RS resource#c, CSI-RS resource#d) has an association relationship, where CSI-RS resource#c is a reference for downlink communication, CSI-RS resource#d is a reference for uplink communication; (CSI-RS resource#a, CSI-RS resource#b) has an association relationship, where CSI-RS resource#a is downlink communication For reference, CSI-RS resource#b is a reference for uplink communication. In this way, when the beam of downlink communication is switched from CSI-RS resource#a to CSI-RS resource#c, the beam of uplink communication is also switched from CSI-RS resource#b to CSI-RS resource#d.
可选地,资源标识可以通过比特位的取值来实现。Optionally, the resource identification can be realized by the value of bits.
具体地,测量报告包括多个比特位,该多个比特位中的第一部分比特位用于指示第一参考信号的资源标识,第二部分比特位用于指示第二参考信号的资源标识。可以理解的是,该测量报告除包括该第一部分比特位和第二部分比特位,还可以包括第三部分比特位,该第三部分比特位的取值可以用于指示参考信号的质量。如表2所示,示出了测量报告的格式。其中,第一参考信号的资源标识可以为CSI-RS resource#b,第二参考信号的资源标识为CSI-RS resource#a。Specifically, the measurement report includes a plurality of bits, the first part of the plurality of bits is used to indicate the resource identifier of the first reference signal, and the second part of the bits is used to indicate the resource identifier of the second reference signal. It is understandable that, in addition to the first part of bits and the second part of bits, the measurement report may also include a third part of bits, and the value of the third part of bits may be used to indicate the quality of the reference signal. As shown in Table 2, the format of the measurement report is shown. The resource identifier of the first reference signal may be CSI-RS resource#b, and the resource identifier of the second reference signal may be CSI-RS resource#a.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2020079291-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020079291-appb-000002
可以理解的是,该测量报告的上报量可以是由网络配置的。该测量报告的上报格式可以网络设备配置的,也可以是协议预定义的。It is understandable that the reported amount of the measurement report may be configured by the network. The report format of the measurement report may be configured by the network device, or may be predefined by the protocol.
例如,测量包括包括的比特位的取值是00000011101,网络设备接收到测量报告可以确定前两位00表示的是第二参考信号的资源标识CSI-RS resource#a,中间7比特0000111是CSI-RS resource#a的质量,后两比特01表示的是第一参考信号的资源标识CSI-RS resource#b(即上行波束)。For example, the value of the bits included in the measurement is 00000011101, and the network device receives the measurement report and can determine that the first two digits 00 represent the resource identifier CSI-RS resource#a of the second reference signal, and the middle 7 bits 0000111 are CSI- The quality of RS resource#a, the last two bits 01 represent the resource identifier CSI-RS resource#b (that is, the uplink beam) of the first reference signal.
可选地,该第一参考信号与该第二参考信号具有关联关系。Optionally, the first reference signal has an association relationship with the second reference signal.
具体地,终端选择第二参考信号可以是根据与第一参考信号的关联关系确定的。例如,该第二参考信号对应的下行波束与该第一参考信号对应的上行波束具有关联关系。其中,该关联关系可以是该第二参考信号对应的下行波束与该第一参考信号对应的上行波束为低相关波束;或者该关联关系可以是该第二参考信号对应的下行波束与该第一参考信号对应的上行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。Specifically, the terminal selecting the second reference signal may be determined according to the association relationship with the first reference signal. For example, the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal has an association relationship with the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. The association relationship may be that the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal are low-correlation beams; or the association relationship may be that the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal and the first reference signal are low-correlation beams. The uplink beams corresponding to the reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
可以理解的是,该低相关波束可以非相邻波束,也可以是距离小于预设阈值的波束。例如,终端可以先根据质量阈值需求选出多个参考信号作为备选第一参考信号,再根据与第二参考信号的低相关波束选出最终的第一参考信号。或者,终端可以先根据与第二参考信号的低相关波束选出多个参考信号作为备选第一参考信号,再根据质量阈值需求选出最终的第一参考信号。It can be understood that the low correlation beam may be a non-adjacent beam, or a beam whose distance is less than a preset threshold. For example, the terminal may first select multiple reference signals as candidate first reference signals according to the quality threshold requirement, and then select the final first reference signal according to the low correlation beam with the second reference signal. Alternatively, the terminal may first select multiple reference signals as candidate first reference signals according to the low correlation beam with the second reference signal, and then select the final first reference signal according to the quality threshold requirement.
还可以理解的是,不同天线面板形成的波束可以是不同终端的天线面板形成的波束,也可以相同终端内的不同天线面板形成的波束,本申请对此不进行限定。It is also understandable that the beams formed by different antenna panels may be beams formed by antenna panels of different terminals, or beams formed by different antenna panels in the same terminal, which is not limited in this application.
还可以理解的是,第一参考信号和第二参考信号的关联关系还可以是其他由协议预定义或者网络设备配置的规则等确定的,本申请对此不进行限定。It can also be understood that the association relationship between the first reference signal and the second reference signal may also be determined by other protocols predefined or rules configured by the network device, which is not limited in this application.
还可以理解的是,终端可以将该关联关系发送给网络设备,也可以是由网络设备自行确定参考信号之间的关联关系。It can also be understood that the terminal may send the association relationship to the network device, or the network device may determine the association relationship between the reference signals by itself.
可选地,在步骤302之前,终端还可以接收来自网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息可以用于指示该终端开启第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为将该第一参考信号对应的上行波束作为备选上行波束的传输模式,其中,该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同。Optionally, before step 302, the terminal may also receive instruction information from the network device, and the instruction information may be used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is corresponding to the first reference signal. The uplink beam of is used as the transmission mode of the candidate uplink beam, where the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
具体地,网络设备可以向终端发送指示信息以指示该终端开启第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在接收到该指示信息之后,向网络设备发送的测量报告可以用于指示第一参 考信号对应的上行波束。因此,网络设备可以灵活的控制终端是否采用第一上行传输模式进行上行传输,从而提高了上行传输的灵活性。Specifically, the network device may send instruction information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode. That is to say, after receiving the indication information, the measurement report sent to the network device by the terminal may be used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Therefore, the network device can flexibly control whether the terminal uses the first uplink transmission mode for uplink transmission, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
可以理解的是,预设参考信号可以是下行控制信道对应的参考信号。在传统方案的默认上行传输模式(即第二上行传输模式)中,终端从多个参考信号中选择第二参考信号对应的下行波束作为目标下行波束,并根据终端的波束一致性,将该预设参考信对应的上行波束用于上行传输。而在第一上行传输模式中,终端通过测量报告向网络设备指示的第一参考信号对应的上行波束与该预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同,即终端采用第一参考信号对应的上行波束进行上行传输。It can be understood that the preset reference signal may be a reference signal corresponding to a downlink control channel. In the default uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) of the traditional scheme, the terminal selects the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal from multiple reference signals as the target downlink beam, and according to the beam consistency of the terminal, the preset It is assumed that the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal is used for uplink transmission. In the first uplink transmission mode, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal indicated to the network device by the terminal through the measurement report is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal, that is, the terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform Uplink transmission.
还可以理解的是,本领域技术人员还可以将“第一上行传输模式”称为“增强默认传输模式”。It can also be understood that those skilled in the art may also refer to the "first uplink transmission mode" as the "enhanced default transmission mode".
还可以理解的是,该指示信息可以携带在DCI、MAC CE或资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)中的任一项。It can also be understood that the indication information can be carried in any of DCI, MAC CE, or resource control (radio resource control, RRC).
可选地,在步骤301之前,终端向网络设备发送能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端支持该第一上行传输模式。Optionally, before step 301, the terminal sends capability information to the network device, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode.
具体地,终端可以提前向网络设备上报自己是否支持该第一上行传输模式。例如,在该能力信息支持该第一上行传输模式的情况下,网络设备才会向终端发送上述指示信息。Specifically, the terminal may report to the network device in advance whether it supports the first uplink transmission mode. For example, only when the capability information supports the first uplink transmission mode, the network device sends the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal.
可以理解的是,该能力信息可以单独发送,也可以是与图2所示的步骤201中的能力信息同时发送的,本申请对此不进行限定。It is understandable that the capability information may be sent separately or simultaneously with the capability information in step 201 shown in FIG. 2, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,本申请实施例中的第一上行传输模式可以包括PUSCH的上行传输模式、PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。Optionally, the first uplink transmission mode in the embodiment of the present application may include at least one of the uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of SRS.
具体地,该第一上行传输模式可以是针对所有的上行信号设置的,也可以针对不同的上行信号分别设置的,从而提高了上行传输的灵活性。Specifically, the first uplink transmission mode may be set for all uplink signals, or may be set for different uplink signals, thereby improving the flexibility of uplink transmission.
在一个实施例中,在步骤302之前,终端还可以向网络设备发送第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入该第一上行传输模式。In an embodiment, before step 302, the terminal may also send first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode.
具体地,终端在检测到遮挡(即终端和网络设备之间存在遮挡物),或检测到终端自身发生了旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第一请求信息以请求接入第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在确定当前的上行传输模式不合适的情况下,可以请求新的上行传输模式(即第一上行传输模式),从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。Specifically, when the terminal detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, it may send the first request information to the network device to request access to the first uplink transmission model. That is to say, the terminal may request a new uplink transmission mode (that is, the first uplink transmission mode) when it is determined that the current uplink transmission mode is not appropriate, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
可以理解的是,网络设备可以在接收到来自终端的该第一请求信息之后,向终端发送上述指示信息以指示终端开启该第一上行传输模式。It is understandable that after receiving the first request information from the terminal, the network device may send the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission mode.
在另一个实施例中,在步骤302之前,终端还可以向网络设备发送第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式。In another embodiment, before step 302, the terminal may also send second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode.
具体地,该第二上行传输模式为将预设参考信号对应的上行波束作为备选上行波束的传输模式,即“默认传输模式”。其中,该预设参考信号对应的上行波束与第一参考信号对应的上行波束不同。终端在检测到遮挡(即终端和网络设备之间存在遮挡物),或检测到终端自身发生了旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第二请求信息以请求退出第二上行传输模式。这样网络设备在接收到第二请求信息之后,可以进行上行波束训练,或者向终端发送上述指示信息以指示终端进入第一上行传输模式。也就是说,终端在检测到当前的上行传输模式(即第二上行传输模式)不合适的情况下,可以告知网络设备退出第二上行传 输模式,这样可以有助于终端寻找合适的上行波束,从而提高上行传输效率。Specifically, the second uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal is used as the candidate uplink beam, that is, the "default transmission mode". Wherein, the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. When the terminal detects obstruction (that is, there is an obstruction between the terminal and the network device), or detects that the terminal itself has rotated, it may send the second request information to the network device to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, after receiving the second request information, the network device may perform uplink beam training, or send the above-mentioned indication information to the terminal to instruct the terminal to enter the first uplink transmission mode. In other words, when the terminal detects that the current uplink transmission mode (that is, the second uplink transmission mode) is not appropriate, it can inform the network device to exit the second uplink transmission mode, which can help the terminal find a suitable uplink beam. Thereby improving the uplink transmission efficiency.
可以理解的是,终端在发送第二请求信息之后,还可以再发送第一请求信息。或者终端在发送第一请求信息之后,再发送第二请求信息。或者,终端只发送第一请求信息,或终端只发送第二请求信息,本申请对此不进行限定。It is understandable that after sending the second request information, the terminal may further send the first request information. Or the terminal sends the second request information after sending the first request information. Or, the terminal only sends the first request information, or the terminal only sends the second request information, which is not limited in this application.
还可以理解的是,终端可以通过红外传感器判断人体距离设备的距离,进而估算辐射强度在人体表面是否会产生MPE的问题。It is also understandable that the terminal can determine the distance between the human body and the device through the infrared sensor, and then estimate whether the radiation intensity on the surface of the human body will cause the MPE problem.
例如,如果开启了默认模式,终端需要使用下行控制信道资源集合(CORESET)波束指示(TCI state)中的QCL类型D的参考信号标识对应的发送波束来进行上行信号/信道的发送。但是,一旦靠近人体,终端的模拟波束可能造成辐射风险,例如,最大允许曝露值(MPE)问题。在这种情况下,默认上行波束可能不再适用,因为终端必须在该波束方向上大幅降低上行发送功率和发送占空比,极大的损害了上行覆盖。一种解决方法是引入终端发起的退出机制,使得基站可以获知终端侧出现了MPE风险。为了使能这种机制以及退出默认模式后的通信,终端可以通过下行波束上报向基站提供备份发送波束的相关信息。在退出默认模式后,终端可以使用备份发送波束进行上行发送。(If default UL mode is enabled,UE shall transmit UL channels/signals by using the Tx beam corresponding to QCL TypeD RS ID contained in a CORESET TCI state.However,analog beamforming in FR2 may create problems if this Tx beam is pointing to human,for example,Maximum permissible exposure(MPE)issue about RF exposure limitation for safety.In this case,the default Tx beam would not be suitable anymore since UE has to limit the maximum uplink duty cycle and uplink power reduction,both of which are harming FR2 UL coverage.One solution is to introduce exit mechanism of the default UL mode which can be initiated by UE to let gNB be aware of MPE risk at UE side.To enable this mechanism and to maintain UL communication after the exit,UE should provide backup UL Tx beam information to gNB,for example,via DL beam reporting.After exiting from default mode,UE could use the back up Tx beam for UL transmission.)For example, if the default mode is enabled, the terminal needs to use the transmission beam corresponding to the QCL type D reference signal identifier in the downlink control channel resource set (CORESET) beam indicator (TCI state) to transmit the uplink signal/channel. However, once close to the human body, the terminal's analog beam may cause radiation risks, such as maximum allowable exposure (MPE) issues. In this case, the default uplink beam may no longer be applicable, because the terminal must greatly reduce the uplink transmission power and transmission duty cycle in the beam direction, which greatly damages the uplink coverage. One solution is to introduce an exit mechanism initiated by the terminal, so that the base station can learn that the MPE risk has occurred on the terminal side. In order to enable this mechanism and the communication after exiting the default mode, the terminal can provide the base station with relevant information about the backup beam through downlink beam reporting. After exiting the default mode, the terminal can use the backup transmission beam for uplink transmission. (If default UL mode is enabled, UE shall transmit UL channels/signals by using the Tx beamcorresponding to QCL TypeD RS ID contained in a CORESET TCI state. However, analogbeamforming in FR2 may create human problems ,for example,Maximumpermissibleexposure(MPE)issue about RFexposurelimitationforsafety.In this case,the default Txbeam would not be suitable anymore since UE has to limit of the maximum power uplink duty cycle and which up harming FR2 UL coverage. One solution is to introduce exit mechanism of the default UL mode which can be initiated by UE to let gNB be aware of MPE risk at UE side. To enable this exchange mechanism and to maintain this uniformity after the UL provide backup UL Tx beam information to gNB, for example, via DL beam reporting. After exiting from default mode, UE could use the backup Tx beam for UL transmission.)
需要说明的是,终端或网络设备支持终端发起的默认上行模式退出机制(support UE-initiated exit mechanism from default UL mode)。It should be noted that the terminal or network device supports the terminal initiated default uplink mode exit mechanism (support UE-initiated exit mechanism from default UL mode).
可选地,终端向网络设备发送第二请求信息具体可以是终端向网络设备发送上行信令,该上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息。Optionally, the terminal sending the second request information to the network device may specifically be that the terminal sends uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that obstruction or rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling includes the second Request information.
具体地,终端在检测到遮挡或检测到终端旋转的情况下,可以向网络设备发送上行信令。该上行信令中可以携带该第二请求信息,这样终端避免了专门发送该第二请求信息,而是复用已有信令,从而减少了信令开销。Specifically, the terminal may send uplink signaling to the network device in the case of detecting the obstruction or detecting the rotation of the terminal. The uplink signaling can carry the second request information, so that the terminal avoids sending the second request information specifically, but reuses existing signaling, thereby reducing signaling overhead.
可以理解的是,终端还可以在检测到当前上行波束不合适的其他情况下(即MPE问题)发送该上行信令,本申请对此不进行限定。It is understandable that the terminal may also send the uplink signaling in other situations where the current uplink beam is detected to be inappropriate (that is, MPE problem), which is not limited in this application.
可选地,该上行信令可以是上行控制信息(uplink control link,UCI),媒体访问控制控制单元(media access control control element,MAC CE)、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。Optionally, the uplink signaling may be any one of uplink control information (uplink control link, UCI), media access control control element (MAC CE), and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
可以理解的是,该上行信令还可以是其他信令,本申请对此不进行限定。例如,风险通知消息或请求切换消息。其中,请求切换消息用于请求网络设备切换终端的发送波束。It is understandable that the uplink signaling may also be other signaling, which is not limited in this application. For example, a risk notification message or a handover request message. Wherein, the switching request message is used to request the network device to switch the transmitting beam of the terminal.
可选地,终端还可以向网络设备发送第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式。Optionally, the terminal may also send third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter the second uplink transmission mode.
具体地,终端在检测到MPE问题消失的情况下,可以向网络设备发送第三请求信息以请求恢复第二上行传输模式。这样终端可以灵活的在第一上行传输模式和第二上行传输模式之间进行切换,从而有助于更进一步提高上行传输的灵活性。Specifically, in a case where the terminal detects that the MPE problem disappears, it may send third request information to the network device to request the restoration of the second uplink transmission mode. In this way, the terminal can flexibly switch between the first uplink transmission mode and the second uplink transmission mode, which helps to further improve the flexibility of uplink transmission.
可选地,终端可以向网络设备发送第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。Optionally, the terminal may send fourth request information to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
具体地,终端可以专门发送第四请求信息以请求退出第一上行传输模式,从而避免了在MPE问题消失的情况下依然使用第一上行传输模式。Specifically, the terminal may specifically send the fourth request message to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode, thereby avoiding still using the first uplink transmission mode when the MPE problem disappears.
可以理解的是,网络设备可以在接收到该第三请求信息时默认退出第一上行传输模式。It is understandable that the network device may exit the first uplink transmission mode by default when receiving the third request information.
需要说明的是,该第三请求信息可以是独立发送的,也可以是携带在已有消息(例如,UCI、MAC CE或PUSCH中发送。同样地,该第四请求信息可以是独立发送的,也可以是携带在已有消息中发送。It should be noted that the third request information can be sent independently, or it can be carried in an existing message (for example, UCI, MAC CE or PUSCH and sent. Similarly, the fourth request information can be sent independently. It can also be carried in an existing message and sent.
还可以理解的是,该第三请求信息或该第四请求信息可以由“风险解除通知”替代,本申请对此不进行限定。It is also understandable that the third request information or the fourth request information can be replaced by a "risk release notice", which is not limited in this application.
可选地,终端在定时器超时时,退出该第一上行传输模式。Optionally, the terminal exits the first uplink transmission mode when the timer expires.
具体地,终端可以设置定时器,在定时器生效的时间范围内,终端使用由第一上行传输模式确定的上行波束进行上行传输。在定时器超时的时候,终端使用有第二上行传输模式确定的上行波束进行上行传输。这样避免了信令的传输,从而节省了信令开销。Specifically, the terminal may set a timer, and within the time range when the timer is effective, the terminal uses the uplink beam determined by the first uplink transmission mode to perform uplink transmission. When the timer expires, the terminal uses the uplink beam determined by the second uplink transmission mode to perform uplink transmission. This avoids the transmission of signaling, thereby saving signaling overhead.
可选地,在步骤302之后,终端采用第一参考信号对应的上行波束与网络设备进行上行通信,从而提高了上行传输的效率。Optionally, after step 302, the terminal uses the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
可选地,在步骤302之后,终端可以根据该第一参考信号的路损,确定上行发送功率,并根据该上行发送功率与网络设备进行上行通信。Optionally, after step 302, the terminal may determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and perform uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
具体地,终端可以先确定出该第一参考信号的路损,并根据该第一参考信号的路损确定上行发送功率,进而根据该上行发送功率,以及该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与网络设备进行上行通信。Specifically, the terminal may first determine the path loss of the first reference signal, and determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal, and then determine the uplink transmission power according to the uplink transmission power, and the uplink beam and the corresponding uplink beam of the first reference signal. The network device performs uplink communication.
图5示出了本申请另一个实施例的用于上行传输的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 5 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to another embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,在不做特别说明的情况下,图5所示的实施例与图3所示的实施例中的相同术语表示的含义相同。It should be noted that, unless otherwise specified, the same terms in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 have the same meaning.
501,终端获取第一参考信号对应的上行波束。501: The terminal acquires an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal.
在一个示例中,该第一参考信号对应的上行波束可以是预设上行波束。也就是说,终端可以将预设上行波束告知网络设备,在终端发生MPE问题的情况下,可以采用预设上行波束进行上行传输,即增加了容错机制,从而有助于提高上行传输的效率。In an example, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be a preset uplink beam. In other words, the terminal can notify the network equipment of the preset uplink beam, and in the case of an MPE problem with the terminal, the preset uplink beam can be used for uplink transmission, that is, a fault-tolerant mechanism is added, thereby helping to improve the efficiency of uplink transmission.
可以理解的是,该预设上行波束可以是终端自己设定的,也可以是协议规定的,本申请对此不进行限定。It is understandable that the preset uplink beam may be set by the terminal itself, or may be stipulated by the agreement, which is not limited in this application.
在另一个示例中,该第一参考信号对应的上行波束可以如图3所示的方案中得到的,即终端通过测量多个参考信号得到该第一参考信号,为避免重复,在此不进行赘述。In another example, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal can be obtained in the solution shown in FIG. 3, that is, the terminal obtains the first reference signal by measuring multiple reference signals. To avoid repetition, this is not done here. Go into details.
在又一个示例中,该第一参考信号对应的上行波束可以是提前进行上行波束训练得到 的,本申请对此不进行限定。In another example, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal may be obtained by performing uplink beam training in advance, which is not limited in this application.
502,终端向网络设备发送指示信息,该指示信息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束。相应地,网络设备接收来自终端的该指示信息。502. The terminal sends instruction information to the network device, where the instruction information is used to indicate an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. Correspondingly, the network device receives the instruction information from the terminal.
具体地,终端向网络设备发送指示信息,该指示信息指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束。也就是说,终端将指示信息发送给网络设备,有助于网络设备能够准确的接收到上行信号,从而提高了上行传输的效率。Specifically, the terminal sends instruction information to the network device, where the instruction information indicates the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal. In other words, the terminal sends the instruction information to the network device, which helps the network device to accurately receive the uplink signal, thereby improving the efficiency of uplink transmission.
可选地,在第一参考信号为终端测量多个参考信号得到的情况下,步骤502具体可以是终端向网络设备发送测量该多个参考信号的第一测量报告,该第一测量报告包括指示信息。Optionally, in the case where the first reference signal is obtained by the terminal by measuring multiple reference signals, step 502 may specifically be that the terminal sends a first measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, and the first measurement report includes an indication information.
可选地,终端还可以向网络设备发送第二测量报告,该第二测量报告用于指示第二参考信号对应的下行波束。Optionally, the terminal may also send a second measurement report to the network device, where the second measurement report is used to indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
具体地,终端还可以根据多个参考信号测量得到第二参考信号,并通过第二测量报告将该第二参考信号对应的下行波束告知网络设备。Specifically, the terminal may also obtain the second reference signal according to multiple reference signal measurements, and notify the network device of the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal through the second measurement report.
可以理解的是,该第二测量报告与该第一测量报告为同一个测量报告,即同一个测量报告同时指示第一参考信号对应的上行波束和第二参考信号对应的下行波束。或者该第二测量报告与该第一测量报告不同,即通过不同的测量报告分别指示第一参考信号信号对应的上行波束和第二参考信号对应的下行波束。It is understandable that the second measurement report and the first measurement report are the same measurement report, that is, the same measurement report indicates the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal at the same time. Or the second measurement report is different from the first measurement report, that is, the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are respectively indicated through different measurement reports.
还可以理解的是,本申请实施例中,终端测量得到第一参考信号和第二参考信号的先后顺序不进行限定。It can also be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, the sequence in which the terminal obtains the first reference signal and the second reference signal through measurement is not limited.
需要说明的是,图3所示的其他实现方式可以与图5所示的实现方式相结合,本申请对此不进行限定。It should be noted that other implementation manners shown in FIG. 3 can be combined with the implementation manner shown in FIG. 5, which is not limited in this application.
图6示出了本申请实施例的有一个用于上行传输的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 6 shows a schematic flowchart of a method for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,在不做特别说明的情况下,图6所示的实施例与图3或图5所示的实施例中的相同术语表示的含义相同。It should be noted that, unless otherwise specified, the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 has the same meaning as the same terms in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 or FIG. 5.
601,终端确定第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。601. The terminal determines second request information, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal Transmission mode.
602,终端向网络设备发送该第二请求信息。相应地,网络设备接收该第二请求信息。602. The terminal sends the second request information to the network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the second request information.
可以理解的是,终端在执行步骤602之后,可以参考图3所示的实施例中终端向网络设备发送第二请求信息之后的步骤,为避免重复在此不进行赘述。It is understandable that after performing step 602, the terminal may refer to the steps after the terminal sends the second request information to the network device in the embodiment shown in FIG.
可选地,步骤602具体可以是终端在检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转的情况下,向该网络设备发送该第二请求信息。Optionally, step 602 may specifically be that the terminal sends the second request information to the network device when the terminal detects the occlusion or detects the rotation of the terminal.
可以理解的是,终端还可以由于其他动机发送该第二请求信息,本申请对此不进行限定。It is understandable that the terminal may also send the second request information due to other motivations, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,步骤602具体可以是终端向该网络设备发送上行信令,该上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息。Optionally, step 602 may specifically be that the terminal sends uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate detection of obstruction or rotation of the terminal, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information.
可以理解的是,该上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。It can be understood that the uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
可选地,终端还可以向该网络设备发送第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入 第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Optionally, the terminal may also send first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam and preamble corresponding to the first reference signal. It is assumed that the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal has different transmission modes.
可以理解的是,终端在退出第二上行传输模式之后,可以停止上行传输或者进行其他操作,也可以是进入该第一上行传输模式,本申请对此不进行限定。It is understandable that after exiting the second uplink transmission mode, the terminal can stop uplink transmission or perform other operations, or enter the first uplink transmission mode, which is not limited in this application.
可选的,终端在退出第二上行传输模式之后,还可以使用协议预定义的波束进行上行传输。该预定义的波束可以是以下一种或多种:终端进行初始接入使用的发送波束,终端进行随机接入使用的发送波束,终端最近一次随机接入使用的发送波束,终端接收系统消息(包括但不限于主信息块(master information block,MIB)、系统消息块(system information blocks,SIBs)等)的接收波束对应的发送波束,终端控制信道资源集合编号为0(CORESET 0)的控制信道资源集合的接收波束对应的发送波束,TCI state ID最大或者最小的TCI state中的QCL类型D的参考信号标识对应的发送波束。Optionally, after exiting the second uplink transmission mode, the terminal may also use a beam predefined by the protocol for uplink transmission. The predefined beam can be one or more of the following: the transmission beam used by the terminal for initial access, the transmission beam used by the terminal for random access, the transmission beam used by the terminal for the last random access, and the terminal receives system messages ( Including but not limited to the receiving beams corresponding to the receiving beams of master information block (MIB) and system information blocks (SIBs), and the control channel of the terminal control channel resource set number 0 (CORESET 0) The transmit beam corresponding to the receive beam of the resource set, and the QCL type D reference signal in the TCI state with the largest or smallest TCI state ID identifies the corresponding transmit beam.
可选的,终端在退出第二上行传输模式之后,还可以使用协议预定义的路损参考信号进行路损估计。该预定义的路损参考信号可以是以下一种或多种:终端初始接入过程中的SS/PBCH,终端随机接入使用的过程中的SS/PBCH,终端最近一次随机接入使用的过程中的SS/PBCH,终端接收系统消息(包括但不限于MIB、SIBs等)的接收波束对应的参考信号,终端控制信道资源集合编号为0(CORESET 0)的控制信道资源集合的接收波束对应的参考信号,TCI state ID最大或者最小的TCI state中的QCL类型D的参考信号。Optionally, after exiting the second uplink transmission mode, the terminal may also use a path loss reference signal predefined by the protocol to perform path loss estimation. The predefined path loss reference signal can be one or more of the following: SS/PBCH during the initial access of the terminal, SS/PBCH during the random access of the terminal, and the last random access process of the terminal In the SS/PBCH, the reference signal corresponding to the receiving beam of the terminal receiving system messages (including but not limited to MIB, SIBs, etc.), and the receiving beam corresponding to the control channel resource set of the terminal control channel resource set number 0 (CORESET 0) Reference signal, the QCL type D reference signal in the TCI state with the largest or smallest TCI state ID.
可选地,终端还可以向该网络设备发送第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。Optionally, the terminal may also send third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam and preamble corresponding to the first reference signal. It is assumed that the uplink beam corresponding to the reference signal has the same transmission mode.
可选地,终端还可以向该网络设备发送第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。Optionally, the terminal may also send fourth request information to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
可选地,该向该网络设备发送该第二请求信息之前,终端还可以接收能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Optionally, before sending the second request information to the network device, the terminal may also receive capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal have different transmission modes.
需要说明的是,图3所示的其他实现方式可以与图6所示的实现方式相结合,本申请对此不进行限定。It should be noted that other implementation manners shown in FIG. 3 can be combined with the implementation manner shown in FIG. 6, which is not limited in this application.
本文中描述的各个实施例可以为独立的方案,也可以根据内在逻辑进行组合,这些方案都落入本申请的保护范围中。The various embodiments described in this document may be independent solutions, or may be combined according to internal logic, and these solutions fall within the protection scope of the present application.
可以理解的是,上述各个方法实施例中,由终端实现的方法和操作,也可以由可用于终端的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现,由网络设备实现的方法和操作,也可以由可用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现。It is understandable that, in the foregoing method embodiments, the methods and operations implemented by the terminal can also be implemented by components (such as chips or circuits) that can be used in the terminal, and the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by the terminal. The components (such as chips or circuits) of network equipment are implemented.
上述主要从各个交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如发射端设备或者接收端设备,为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of various interactions. It can be understood that each network element, such as a transmitting end device or a receiving end device, includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function in order to realize the above-mentioned functions. Those skilled in the art should be aware that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对发射端设备或者接收端设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以使用硬件的形式实现,也可以使用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以使用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。The embodiments of the present application can divide the transmitting end device or the receiving end device into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. middle. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented either in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of using the corresponding functional modules to divide each functional module.
应理解,本申请实施例中的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例,而非限制本申请实施例的范围。It should be understood that the specific examples in the embodiments of the present application are only to help those skilled in the art to better understand the embodiments of the present application, rather than limiting the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
以上,结合图3、图5和图6详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下,结合图7至图14详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。应理解,装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应,因此,未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例,为了简洁,这里不再赘述。Above, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail with reference to FIG. 3, FIG. 5, and FIG. 6. Hereinafter, the device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 7 to 14. It should be understood that the description of the device embodiment and the description of the method embodiment correspond to each other. Therefore, for the content that is not described in detail, please refer to the above method embodiment. For the sake of brevity, it will not be repeated here.
图7示出了本申请实施例的用于上行传输的装置700的示意性框图。FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 700 for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
应理解,该装置700可以对应于图1所示的各个终端或终端内的芯片,以及图3、图5和图6所示的实施例中的终端或终端内的芯片,可以具有图3、图5和图6所示的方法实施例中的终端的任意功能。例如,该装置700,包括接收模块710和发送模块720。It should be understood that the device 700 may correspond to the terminals or chips in the terminals shown in FIG. 1, and the terminals or chips in the terminals in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, and FIG. Any function of the terminal in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6. For example, the device 700 includes a receiving module 710 and a sending module 720.
该接收模块710,用于接收来自网络设备的多个参考信号;The receiving module 710 is configured to receive multiple reference signals from a network device;
该发送模块720,用于向该网络设备发送测量该多个参考信号的测量报告,该测量报告用于指示该多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,以及用于指示该多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The sending module 720 is configured to send a measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and to indicate the multiple reference signals. A downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal in the reference signals.
可选地,该测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,该第一参考信号信息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,该第二参考信号信息用于指示该第二参考信号对应的下行波束。Optionally, the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used to indicate the second reference signal. 2. Downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
可选地,该第一参考信号信息包括该第一参考信号的信号标识或该第一参考信号的资源标识。Optionally, the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
可选地,该第一参考信号与该第二参考信号具有关联关系,该关联关系为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或该第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。Optionally, the first reference signal has an association relationship with the second reference signal, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams, or the second reference signal The uplink beam corresponding to an uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
可选地,该接收模块710,还用于接收来自该网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息用于指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Optionally, the receiving module 710 is further configured to receive instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink corresponding to the first reference signal. The beam has a different transmission mode from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
可选地,该发送模块720,还用于向该网络设备发送第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入该第一上行传输模式;和/或该发送模块720,还用于向该网络设备发送第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。Optionally, the sending module 720 is also used to send first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and/or the sending module 720 is also used to send The network device sends second request information, the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal Transmission mode.
可选地,该发送模块720具体用于:向该网络设备发送上行信令,该上行信令用于指 示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息,该上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。Optionally, the sending module 720 is specifically configured to: send uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate detection of obstruction or rotation of the terminal, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information, The uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
可选地,该发送模块720,还用于向该网络设备发送第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;和/或该发送模块720,还用于向该网络设备发送第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。Optionally, the sending module 720 is further configured to send third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode corresponds to the first reference signal. And/or the sending module 720 is further configured to send fourth request information to the network device, and the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first Uplink transmission mode.
可选地,该发送模块720,还用于发送能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Optionally, the sending module 720 is further configured to send capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset reference Different transmission modes of the uplink beam corresponding to the signal.
可选地,该第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、物理上行控制信道PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或探测参考信号SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。Optionally, the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of sounding reference signal SRS.
可选地,该发送模块720,还用于采用该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,与该网络设备进行上行通信。Optionally, the sending module 720 is further configured to use the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device.
可选地,该装置还包括处理模块,该处理模块用于根据该第一参考信号的路损,确定上行发送功率;Optionally, the device further includes a processing module configured to determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal;
该发送模块720,用于根据该上行发送功率,与该网络设备进行上行通信。The sending module 720 is configured to perform uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
关于上述接收模块710和发送模块720更详细的描述,可参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述,在此不再说明。For a more detailed description of the foregoing receiving module 710 and sending module 720, reference may be made to the related description in the foregoing method embodiment, which is not described herein again.
图8示出了本申请实施例提供的通信装置800,该装置800可以为图3、图5或图6中所述的终端。该装置可以采用如图8所示的硬件架构。该装置可以包括处理器810和收发器830,可选地,该装置还可以包括存储器840,该处理器810、收发器830和存储器840通过内部连接通路互相通信。图7中的处理模块所实现的相关功能可以由处理器810来实现,接收模块710和发送模块720所实现的相关功能可以由处理器810控制收发器830来实现。FIG. 8 shows a communication device 800 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The device 800 may be the terminal described in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, or FIG. 6. The device can adopt the hardware architecture shown in FIG. 8. The device may include a processor 810 and a transceiver 830. Optionally, the device may also include a memory 840. The processor 810, the transceiver 830, and the memory 840 communicate with each other through an internal connection path. The related functions implemented by the processing module in FIG. 7 may be implemented by the processor 810, and the related functions implemented by the receiving module 710 and the sending module 720 may be implemented by the processor 810 controlling the transceiver 830.
可选地,处理器810可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),专用处理器,或一个或多个用于执行本申请实施例技术方案的集成电路。或者,处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。例如可以是基带处理器、或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信装置(如,基站、终端、或芯片等)进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。Optionally, the processor 810 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a dedicated processor, or one or more It is an integrated circuit that implements the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application. Alternatively, a processor may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions). For example, it can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data, and the central processor can be used to control communication devices (such as base stations, terminals, or chips), execute software programs, and process data in the software programs.
可选地,该处理器810可以包括是一个或多个处理器,例如包括一个或多个中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),在处理器是一个CPU的情况下,该CPU可以是单核CPU,也可以是多核CPU。Optionally, the processor 810 may include one or more processors, such as one or more central processing units (CPU). In the case that the processor is a CPU, the CPU may be a single processor. The core CPU can also be a multi-core CPU.
该收发器830用于发送和接收数据和/或信号,以及接收数据和/或信号。该收发器可以包括发射器和接收器,发射器用于发送数据和/或信号,接收器用于接收数据和/或信号。The transceiver 830 is used to send and receive data and/or signals, and to receive data and/or signals. The transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver, the transmitter is used to send data and/or signals, and the receiver is used to receive data and/or signals.
该存储器840包括但不限于是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可擦除可编程存储器(erasable programmable read  only memory,EPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM),该存储器840用于存储相关指令及数据。The memory 840 includes, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable memory (erasable read only memory, EPROM), and read-only memory. A compact disc (read-only memory, CD-ROM), and the memory 840 is used to store related instructions and data.
存储器840用于存储终端的程序代码和数据,可以为单独的器件或集成在处理器810中。The memory 840 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal, and may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 810.
具体地,所述处理器810用于控制收发器与终端进行信息传输。具体可参见方法实施例中的描述,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the processor 810 is configured to control the transceiver to perform information transmission with the terminal. For details, please refer to the description in the method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,装置800还可以包括输出设备和输入设备。输出设备和处理器810通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二级管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备和处理器810通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the apparatus 800 may further include an output device and an input device. The output device communicates with the processor 810 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc. . The input device communicates with the processor 810 and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device can be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
可以理解的是,图8仅仅示出了通信装置的简化设计。在实际应用中,该装置还可以分别包含必要的其他元件,包含但不限于任意数量的收发器、处理器、控制器、存储器等,而所有可以实现本申请的终端都在本申请的保护范围之内。It can be understood that FIG. 8 only shows a simplified design of the communication device. In practical applications, the device may also contain other necessary components, including but not limited to any number of transceivers, processors, controllers, memories, etc., and all terminals that can implement this application are within the protection scope of this application. within.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置800可以是芯片,例如可以为可用于终端中的通信芯片,用于实现终端中处理器810的相关功能。该芯片可以为实现相关功能的现场可编程门阵列,专用集成芯片,系统芯片,中央处理器,网络处理器,数字信号处理电路,微控制器,还可以采用可编程控制器或其他集成芯片。该芯片中,可选的可以包括一个或多个存储器,用于存储程序代码,当所述代码被执行时,使得处理器实现相应的功能。In a possible design, the device 800 may be a chip, for example, a communication chip that can be used in a terminal to implement related functions of the processor 810 in the terminal. The chip can be a field programmable gate array, a dedicated integrated chip, a system chip, a central processing unit, a network processor, a digital signal processing circuit, a microcontroller, and a programmable controller or other integrated chips for realizing related functions. The chip may optionally include one or more memories for storing program codes. When the codes are executed, the processor realizes corresponding functions.
本申请实施例还提供一种装置,该装置可以是终端也可以是电路。该装置可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端所执行的动作。The embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be a terminal or a circuit. The device can be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal in the foregoing method embodiments.
图9示出了本申请实施例的用于上行传输的装置900的示意性框图。FIG. 9 shows a schematic block diagram of an apparatus 900 for uplink transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.
应理解,该装置900可以对应于图1所示的网络设备或网络设备内的芯片,或者图3、图5和图6所示的实施例中的网络设备或网络设备内的芯片,可以具有方法中的网络设备的任意功能。例如,该装置900,包括发送模块910和接收模块920。It should be understood that the apparatus 900 may correspond to the network device or the chip in the network device shown in FIG. 1, or the network device or the chip in the network device in the embodiments shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, and FIG. Any function of the network device in the method. For example, the device 900 includes a sending module 910 and a receiving module 920.
该发送模块910,用于向终端发送多个参考信号;The sending module 910 is configured to send multiple reference signals to the terminal;
该接收模块920,用于接收来自该终端的测量报告,该测量报告用于指示该多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,以及用于指示该多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The receiving module 920 is configured to receive a measurement report from the terminal, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and the measurement report is used to indicate the second one of the multiple reference signals. The downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
可选地,该测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,该第一参考信号信息用于指示该第一参考信号对应的上行波束,该第二参考信号信息用于指示该第二参考信号对应的下行波束。Optionally, the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal, and the second reference signal information is used to indicate the second reference signal. 2. Downlink beam corresponding to the reference signal.
可选地,该第一参考信号信息包括该第一参考信号的信号标识或该第一参考信号的资源标识。Optionally, the first reference signal information includes a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
可选地,该第一参考信号与该第二参考信号具有关联关系,该关联关系为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或该第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与该第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。Optionally, the first reference signal has an association relationship with the second reference signal, and the association relationship is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are low-correlation beams, or the second reference signal The uplink beam corresponding to an uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
可选地,该接收模块920,还用于接收来自该网络设备的指示信息,该指示信息用于 指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Optionally, the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to enable the first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink corresponding to the first reference signal. The beam has a different transmission mode from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
可选地,该接收模块920,还用于接收来自该终端的第一请求信息,该第一请求信息用于请求进入该第一上行传输模式;和/或该装置还包括处理模块,该处理模块用于在接收到该第一请求信息的情况下,关闭第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。Optionally, the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive first request information from the terminal, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and/or the device further includes a processing module, which processes The module is used to turn off the second uplink transmission mode when the first request information is received, and the second uplink transmission mode is the same transmission of the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal model.
可选地,该接收模块920,还用于接收接收来自该终端的第二请求信息,该第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;该装置还包括处理模块,该处理模块用于在接收到该第二请求信息的情况下,关闭该第二上行传输模式。Optionally, the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive second request information from the terminal, where the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is the first reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; the device further includes a processing module configured to turn off the second uplink transmission mode when the second request information is received.
可选地,该接收模块920具体用于:接收来自该终端的上行信令,该上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且该上行信令包括该第二请求信息,该上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。Optionally, the receiving module 920 is specifically configured to: receive uplink signaling from the terminal, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate detection of obstruction or rotation of the terminal, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information, The uplink signaling is any one of uplink control information UCI, medium access control control unit MAC CE, and physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
可选地,该接收模块920,还用于接收来自该终端的第三请求信息,该第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,该第二上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;或该接收模块920,还用于接收来自该终端的第四请求信息,该第四请求信息用于请求退出该第一上行传输模式。Optionally, the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive third request information from the terminal, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode corresponds to the first reference signal The uplink beam of the reference signal corresponds to the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; or the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive fourth request information from the terminal, and the fourth request information is used to request to quit the first uplink transmission model.
可选地,该接收模块920,还用于接收能力信息,该能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,该第一上行传输模式为该第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Optionally, the receiving module 920 is further configured to receive capability information, the capability information being used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, and the first uplink transmission mode is the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and the preset reference Different transmission modes of the uplink beam corresponding to the signal.
可选地,该第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。Optionally, the first uplink transmission mode includes at least one of the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of SRS.
关于上述发送模块910和接收模块920更详细的描述,可参考上述方法实施例中的相关描述,在此不再说明。For a more detailed description of the foregoing sending module 910 and receiving module 920, reference may be made to the relevant description in the foregoing method embodiment, which is not described herein again.
图10示出了本申请实施例提供的用于上行传输的装置1000,该装置1000可以为图3、图5或图6中所述的网络设备。该装置可以采用如图10所示的硬件架构。该装置可以包括处理器1010和收发器1020,可选地,该装置还可以包括存储器1030,该处理器1010、收发器1020和存储器1030通过内部连接通路互相通信。图9所示的实施例中的处理模块所实现的相关功能可以由处理器1010来实现,发送模块910和接收模块920所实现的相关功能可以由处理器1010控制收发器1020来实现。FIG. 10 shows an apparatus 1000 for uplink transmission provided in an embodiment of the present application. The apparatus 1000 may be the network device described in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, or FIG. 6. The device can adopt the hardware architecture shown in FIG. 10. The device may include a processor 1010 and a transceiver 1020. Optionally, the device may also include a memory 1030. The processor 1010, the transceiver 1020, and the memory 1030 communicate with each other through an internal connection path. The related functions implemented by the processing module in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 may be implemented by the processor 1010, and the related functions implemented by the sending module 910 and the receiving module 920 may be implemented by the processor 1010 controlling the transceiver 1020.
可选地,处理器1010可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),微处理器,特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),专用处理器,或一个或多个用于执行本申请实施例技术方案的集成电路。或者,处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路、和/或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。例如可以是基带处理器、或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信装置(如,基站、终端、或芯片等)进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。Optionally, the processor 1010 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a dedicated processor, or one or more It is an integrated circuit that implements the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application. Alternatively, a processor may refer to one or more devices, circuits, and/or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions). For example, it can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit. The baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data, and the central processor can be used to control communication devices (such as base stations, terminals, or chips), execute software programs, and process data in the software programs.
可选地,该处理器1010可以包括是一个或多个处理器,例如包括一个或多个中央处 理单元(central processing unit,CPU),在处理器是一个CPU的情况下,该CPU可以是单核CPU,也可以是多核CPU。Optionally, the processor 1010 may include one or more processors, such as one or more central processing units (CPU). In the case where the processor is a CPU, the CPU may be a single processor. The core CPU can also be a multi-core CPU.
该收发器1020用于发送和接收数据和/或信号,以及接收数据和/或信号。该收发器可以包括发射器和接收器,发射器用于发送数据和/或信号,接收器用于接收数据和/或信号。The transceiver 1020 is used to send and receive data and/or signals, and to receive data and/or signals. The transceiver may include a transmitter and a receiver, the transmitter is used to send data and/or signals, and the receiver is used to receive data and/or signals.
该存储器1030包括但不限于是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可擦除可编程存储器(erasable programmable read only memory,EPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM),该存储器1030用于存储相关指令及数据。The memory 1030 includes, but is not limited to, random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), erasable programmable memory (erasable read only memory, EPROM), and read-only memory. A compact disc (read-only memory, CD-ROM), the memory 1030 is used to store related instructions and data.
存储器1030用于存储网络设备的程序代码和数据,可以为单独的器件或集成在处理器1010中。The memory 1030 is used to store program codes and data of the network device, and may be a separate device or integrated in the processor 1010.
具体地,所述处理器1010用于控制收发器与终端进行信息传输。具体可参见方法实施例中的描述,在此不再赘述。Specifically, the processor 1010 is used to control the transceiver to perform information transmission with the terminal. For details, please refer to the description in the method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在具体实现中,作为一种实施例,装置1000还可以包括输出设备和输入设备。输出设备和处理器1010通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二级管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备和处理器1010通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。In a specific implementation, as an embodiment, the apparatus 1000 may further include an output device and an input device. The output device communicates with the processor 1010 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector, etc. . The input device communicates with the processor 1010 and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device can be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
可以理解的是,图10仅仅示出了通信装置的简化设计。在实际应用中,该装置还可以分别包含必要的其他元件,包含但不限于任意数量的收发器、处理器、控制器、存储器等,而所有可以实现本申请的网络设备都在本申请的保护范围之内。It can be understood that FIG. 10 only shows a simplified design of the communication device. In practical applications, the device can also contain other necessary components, including but not limited to any number of transceivers, processors, controllers, memories, etc., and all network devices that can implement this application are protected by this application. Within range.
在一种可能的设计中,该装置1000可以是芯片,例如可以为可用于网络设备中的通信芯片,用于实现网络设备中处理器1010的相关功能。该芯片可以为实现相关功能的现场可编程门阵列,专用集成芯片,系统芯片,中央处理器,网络处理器,数字信号处理电路,微控制器,还可以采用可编程控制器或其他集成芯片。该芯片中,可选的可以包括一个或多个存储器,用于存储程序代码,当所述代码被执行时,使得处理器实现相应的功能。In a possible design, the apparatus 1000 may be a chip, for example, a communication chip that can be used in a network device, and is used to implement related functions of the processor 1010 in the network device. The chip can be a field programmable gate array, a dedicated integrated chip, a system chip, a central processing unit, a network processor, a digital signal processing circuit, a microcontroller, and a programmable controller or other integrated chips for realizing related functions. The chip may optionally include one or more memories for storing program codes. When the codes are executed, the processor realizes corresponding functions.
本申请实施例还提供一种装置,该装置可以是网络设备也可以是电路。该装置可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由网络设备所执行的动作。The embodiment of the present application also provides a device, which may be a network device or a circuit. The device can be used to perform the actions performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiments.
可选地,本实施例中的装置为终端时,图11示出了一种简化的终端的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便,图11中,终端以手机作为例子。如图11所示,终端包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对终端进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是,有些种类的终端可以不具有输入输出装置。Optionally, when the device in this embodiment is a terminal, FIG. 11 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate. In FIG. 11, the terminal uses a mobile phone as an example. As shown in Figure 11, the terminal includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device. The processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program. The memory is mainly used to store software programs and data. The radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signals and radio frequency signals and the processing of radio frequency signals. The antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminals may not have input and output devices.
当需要发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号, 并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明,图11中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端产品中,可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置,也可以是与处理器集成在一起,本申请实施例对此不做限制。When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the terminal, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. For ease of description, only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 11. In actual end products, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device. The memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
在本申请实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端的收发单元,将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端的处理单元。如图11所示,终端包括收发单元1110和处理单元1120。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器,处理单板,处理模块、处理装置等。可选的,可以将收发单元1110中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元1110中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元1110包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。In the embodiments of the present application, the antenna and radio frequency circuit with the transceiver function may be regarded as the transceiver unit of the terminal, and the processor with the processing function may be regarded as the processing unit of the terminal. As shown in FIG. 11, the terminal includes a transceiver unit 1110 and a processing unit 1120. The transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, and so on. The processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiving unit 1110 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiving unit 1110 can be regarded as the sending unit, that is, the transceiving unit 1110 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. The transceiver unit may sometimes be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit. The receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit. The transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
应理解,收发单元1110用于执行上述方法实施例中终端侧的发送操作和接收操作,处理单元1120用于执行上述方法实施例中终端上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。It should be understood that the transceiving unit 1110 is used to perform sending and receiving operations on the terminal side in the foregoing method embodiment, and the processing unit 1120 is used to perform other operations on the terminal in addition to the transceiving operation in the foregoing method embodiment.
例如,在一种实现方式中,处理单元1120用于执行图3中终端侧的处理步骤。收发单元1110,用于执行图3中的步骤301和302中的收发操作,和/或收发单元1110还用于执行本申请实施例中终端侧的其他收发步骤。For example, in an implementation manner, the processing unit 1120 is configured to execute the processing steps on the terminal side in FIG. 3. The transceiving unit 1110 is configured to perform the transceiving operations in steps 301 and 302 in FIG. 3, and/or the transceiving unit 1110 is also configured to perform other transceiving steps on the terminal side in the embodiment of the present application.
当该装置为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路、通信接口;处理单元为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。When the device is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit. Wherein, the transceiver unit may be an input/output circuit or a communication interface; the processing unit is a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
可选地,该装置为终端时,还可以参照图12所示的设备。作为一个例子,该设备可以完成类似于图8中处理器810的功能。在图12中,该设备包括处理器1201,发送数据处理器1203,接收数据处理器1205。上述图7所示的实施例中的处理模块可以是图12中的该处理器1201,并完成相应的功能。上述图7所示的实施例中的发送模块720和接收模块710可以是图12中的发送数据处理器1203和接收数据处理器1205。虽然图12中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器,但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明,仅是示意性的。Optionally, when the device is a terminal, the device shown in FIG. 12 can also be referred to. As an example, the device can perform functions similar to the processor 810 in FIG. 8. In FIG. 12, the device includes a processor 1201, a data sending processor 1203, and a data receiving processor 1205. The processing module in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may be the processor 1201 in FIG. 12 and complete corresponding functions. The sending module 720 and the receiving module 710 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 may be the sending data processor 1203 and the receiving data processor 1205 in FIG. 12. Although the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 12, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
图13示出本实施例的另一种形式。处理装置1300中包括调制子系统、中央处理子系统、周边子系统等模块。本实施例中的通信设备可以作为其中的调制子系统。具体的,该调制子系统可以包括处理器1303,接口1304。其中处理器1303完成上述图7所示的实施例中的处理模块的功能,接口1304完成上述接收模块710和发送模块720的功能。作为另一种变形,该调制子系统包括存储器1306、处理器1303及存储在存储器上并可在处理器上运行的程序,所述处理器执行所述程序时实现实施例所述方法。需要注意的是,所述存储器1306可以是非易失性的,也可以是易失性的,其位置可以位于调制子系统内部,也可以位于处理装置1300中,只要该存储器1306可以连接到所述处理器1303即可。Fig. 13 shows another form of this embodiment. The processing device 1300 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem. The communication device in this embodiment can be used as the modulation subsystem therein. Specifically, the modulation subsystem may include a processor 1303 and an interface 1304. The processor 1303 performs the functions of the processing module in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the interface 1304 performs the functions of the receiving module 710 and the sending module 720 described above. As another variation, the modulation subsystem includes a memory 1306, a processor 1303, and a program stored in the memory and capable of running on the processor, and the processor implements the method described in the embodiment when the program is executed. It should be noted that the memory 1306 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 1300, as long as the memory 1306 can be connected to the The processor 1303 is fine.
本实施例中的装置为网络设备时,该网络设备可以如图14所示,例如,该装置140为基站。该基站可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。基站140可包括一个或多个DU 1401和一个或多个CU 1402。CU1402可以与下一代核心网(NG core,NC)通信。所述DU 1401可以包括至少一个天线14011,至少一个射频单元14011,至少一个处理器14013和至少一个存储器14014。所述DU 1401部分主要用于射 频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,以及部分基带处理。CU1402可以包括至少一个处理器14022和至少一个存储器14021。CU1402和DU1401之间可以通过接口进行通信,其中,控制面(control plane)接口可以为Fs-C,比如F1-C,用户面(user plane)接口可以为Fs-U,比如F1-U。When the device in this embodiment is a network device, the network device may be as shown in FIG. 14, for example, the device 140 is a base station. The base station can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The base station 140 may include one or more DU 1401 and one or more CU 1402. CU1402 can communicate with the next-generation core network (NG core, NC). The DU 1401 may include at least one antenna 14011, at least one radio frequency unit 14011, at least one processor 14013, and at least one memory 14014. The DU 1401 part is mainly used for the transmission and reception of radio frequency signals, the conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, and part of the baseband processing. The CU 1402 may include at least one processor 14022 and at least one memory 14021. CU1402 and DU1401 can communicate through interfaces, where the control plane interface can be Fs-C, such as F1-C, and the user plane interface can be Fs-U, such as F1-U.
所述CU 1402部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述DU 1401与CU1402可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。所述CU 1402为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,主要用于完成基带处理功能。例如所述CU 1402可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。The CU 1402 part is mainly used for baseband processing, control of base stations, and so on. The DU 1401 and the CU 1402 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station. The CU 1402 is the control center of the base station, which may also be referred to as a processing unit, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions. For example, the CU 1402 may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
具体的,CU和DU上的基带处理可以根据无线网络的协议层划分,例如分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层及以上协议层的功能设置在CU,PDCP以下的协议层,例如无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层和介质接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层等的功能设置在DU。又例如,CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能,DU实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)、MAC和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。Specifically, the baseband processing on the CU and DU can be divided according to the protocol layer of the wireless network, for example, the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer and the functions of the above protocol layers are set in the CU, the protocol layer below PDCP, For example, functions such as the radio link control (RLC) layer and the medium access control (MAC) layer are set in the DU. For another example, CU implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC), packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions, and DU implements radio link control (radio link control, RLC), MAC and physical functions. The function of the (physical, PHY) layer.
此外,可选的,基站140可以包括一个或多个射频单元(RU),一个或多个DU和一个或多个CU。其中,DU可以包括至少一个处理器14013和至少一个存储器14014,RU可以包括至少一个天线14011和至少一个射频单元14011,CU可以包括至少一个处理器14022和至少一个存储器14021。In addition, optionally, the base station 140 may include one or more radio frequency units (RU), one or more DUs, and one or more CUs. The DU may include at least one processor 14013 and at least one memory 14014, the RU may include at least one antenna 14011 and at least one radio frequency unit 14011, and the CU may include at least one processor 14022 and at least one memory 14021.
例如,在一种实现方式中,处理器14013用于执行图3中网络设备侧的处理步骤。射频单元14011,用于执行图3中的步骤301和302中的收发操作。For example, in an implementation manner, the processor 14013 is configured to execute the processing steps on the network device side in FIG. 3. The radio frequency unit 14011 is used to perform the receiving and sending operations in steps 301 and 302 in FIG. 3.
在一个实例中,所述CU1402可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如5G网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述存储器14021和处理器14022可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。所述DU1401可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入指示的无线接入网(如5G网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述存储器14014和处理器14013可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the CU1402 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network (such as a 5G network) with a single access indication, and can also support wireless access networks of different access standards. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network). The memory 14021 and the processor 14022 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board. The DU1401 can be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards can jointly support a wireless access network with a single access indication (such as a 5G network), or can respectively support wireless access networks with different access standards (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network). The memory 14014 and the processor 14013 may serve one or more boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另 一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above-mentioned embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server, or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
应理解,处理器可以是集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be understood that the processor may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a ready-made programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field, such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchronous link DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), and synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synchronous link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In this application, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
应理解,说明书通篇中提到的“一个实施例”或“一实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各处出现的“在一个实施例中”或“在一实施例中”未必一定指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序 应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that “one embodiment” or “an embodiment” mentioned throughout the specification means that a specific feature, structure, or characteristic related to the embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the appearances of "in one embodiment" or "in an embodiment" in various places throughout the specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. In addition, these specific features, structures or characteristics can be combined in one or more embodiments in any suitable manner. It should be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component can be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (e.g. data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through a signal) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
还应理解,本文中涉及的第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。It should also be understood that the first, second, and various numerical numbers involved in this specification are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。其中,单独存在A或B,并不限定A或B的数量。以单独存在A为例,可以理解为具有一个或多个A。It should be understood that the term "and/or" in this text is only an association relationship describing the associated objects, indicating that there can be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, and both A and B exist. , There are three cases of B alone. Among them, the presence of A or B alone does not limit the number of A or B. Taking the existence of A alone as an example, it can be understood as having one or more A.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。A person of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in combination with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the system, device and unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而 前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (53)

  1. 一种用于上行传输的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for uplink transmission, characterized in that it comprises:
    接收来自网络设备的多个参考信号;Receive multiple reference signals from network equipment;
    向所述网络设备发送测量所述多个参考信号的测量报告,所述测量报告用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,以及用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。Send a measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and is used to indicate the multiple reference signals The downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal in the signal.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,所述第一参考信号信息用于指示所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束,所述第二参考信号信息用于指示所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The method according to claim 1, wherein the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, and the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal , The second reference signal information is used to indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号信息包括所述第一参考信号的信号标识或所述第一参考信号的资源标识。The method according to claim 2, wherein the first reference signal information comprises a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号与所述第二参考信号具有关联关系,所述关联关系为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或所述第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is an uplink corresponding to the first reference signal. The downlink beam corresponding to the beam and the second reference signal is a low correlation beam, or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述网络设备发送测量报告之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein before the sending a measurement report to the network device, the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述网络设备的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Receiving instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to turn on a first uplink transmission mode, where the first uplink transmission mode is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal corresponds to the preset reference signal Different transmission modes for uplink beams.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,在接收到来自所述网络设备发送的所述指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, characterized in that, before receiving the indication information sent from the network device, the method further comprises:
    向所述网络设备发送第一请求信息,所述第一请求信息用于请求进入所述第一上行传输模式;和/或Sending first request information to the network device, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and/or
    向所述网络设备发送第二请求信息,所述第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。Sending second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and a preset reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述网络设备发送第二请求信息包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein the sending the second request information to the network device comprises:
    向所述网络设备发送上行信令,所述上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且所述上行信令包括所述第二请求信息,所述上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。Send uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that blocking is detected or terminal rotation is detected, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is uplink control Any of the information UCI, media access control control unit MAC CE, physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  8. 根据权利要求5至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 5 to 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    向所述网络设备发送第三请求信息,所述第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;和/或Sending third request information to the network device, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and a preset reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode; and/or
    向所述网络设备发送第四请求信息,所述第四请求信息用于请求退出所述第一上行传 输模式。Sending fourth request information to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  9. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述网络设备发送测量报告之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein before the sending a measurement report to the network device, the method further comprises:
    发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Send capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, where the first uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal .
  10. 根据权利要求5至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、物理上行控制信道PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或探测参考信号SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。The method according to any one of claims 5 to 9, wherein the first uplink transmission mode comprises a first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, a first uplink transmission mode of a physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or a sounding reference signal At least one of the first uplink transmission modes of the SRS.
  11. 根据权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    采用所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束,与所述网络设备进行上行通信。The uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is used to perform uplink communication with the network device.
  12. 根据权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据所述第一参考信号的路损,确定上行发送功率;Determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal;
    根据所述上行发送功率,与所述网络设备进行上行通信。Perform uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
  13. 一种用于上行传输的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for uplink transmission, characterized in that it comprises:
    向终端发送多个参考信号;Send multiple reference signals to the terminal;
    接收来自所述终端的测量报告,所述测量报告用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,以及用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。Receive a measurement report from the terminal, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and is used to indicate the second reference signal corresponds to the second reference signal among the multiple reference signals The downlink beam.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,所述第一参考信号信息用于指示所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束,所述第二参考信号信息用于指示所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The method according to claim 13, wherein the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, and the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal , The second reference signal information is used to indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号信息包括所述第一参考信号的信号标识或所述第一参考信号的资源标识。The method according to claim 14, wherein the first reference signal information comprises a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  16. 根据权利要求13至15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号与所述第二参考信号具有关联关系,所述关联关系为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或所述第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。The method according to any one of claims 13 to 15, wherein the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is an uplink corresponding to the first reference signal. The downlink beam corresponding to the beam and the second reference signal is a low correlation beam, or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  17. 根据权利要求13至16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接收来自所述终端的测量报告之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 16, wherein before the receiving the measurement report from the terminal, the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述网络设备的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Receiving instruction information from the network device, where the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to turn on a first uplink transmission mode, where the first uplink transmission mode is that the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal corresponds to the preset reference signal Different transmission modes for uplink beams.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,在向所述终端发送所述指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17, wherein before sending the indication information to the terminal, the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述终端的第一请求信息,所述第一请求信息用于请求进入所述第一上行传输模式;和/或Receiving first request information from the terminal, where the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and/or
    在接收到所述第一请求信息的情况下,关闭第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。When the first request information is received, the second uplink transmission mode is turned off, and the second uplink transmission mode is transmission in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal model.
  19. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,在向所述终端发送所述指示信息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17, wherein before sending the indication information to the terminal, the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述终端的第二请求信息,所述第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;Receiving second request information from the terminal, where the second request information is used to request to exit a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and a preset reference signal The corresponding uplink beams have the same transmission mode;
    在接收到所述第二请求信息的情况下,关闭所述第二上行传输模式。When the second request information is received, the second uplink transmission mode is turned off.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述接收来自所述终端的第二请求信息包括:The method according to claim 19, wherein the receiving the second request information from the terminal comprises:
    接收来自所述终端的上行信令,所述上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且所述上行信令包括所述第二请求信息,所述上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。Receive uplink signaling from the terminal, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that blocking or rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is uplink control Any of the information UCI, media access control control unit MAC CE, physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  21. 根据权利要求17至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 17 to 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收来自所述终端的第三请求信息,所述第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;或Receiving third request information from the terminal, where the third request information is used to request to enter a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode is an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal and a preset reference signal The corresponding uplink beam has the same transmission mode; or
    接收来自所述终端的第四请求信息,所述第四请求信息用于请求退出所述第一上行传输模式。Receiving fourth request information from the terminal, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  22. 根据权利要求13至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述网络设备发送测量报告之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 13 to 21, wherein before the sending a measurement report to the network device, the method further comprises:
    接收能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。Receiving capability information, where the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports a first uplink transmission mode, where the first uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal .
  23. 根据权利要求17至22中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。The method according to any one of claims 17 to 22, wherein the first uplink transmission mode comprises the first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, the first uplink transmission mode of PUCCH, or the first uplink transmission mode of SRS At least one of.
  24. 一种用于上行传输的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for uplink transmission, characterized in that it comprises:
    接收模块,用于接收来自网络设备的多个参考信号;The receiving module is used to receive multiple reference signals from network equipment;
    发送模块,用于向所述网络设备发送测量所述多个参考信号的测量报告,所述测量报告用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,以及用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The sending module is configured to send a measurement report for measuring the multiple reference signals to the network device, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and to indicate A downlink beam corresponding to a second reference signal among the multiple reference signals.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,所述第一参考信号信息用于指示所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束,所述第二参考信号信息用于指示所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The apparatus according to claim 24, wherein the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, and the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal , The second reference signal information is used to indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号信息包括所述第一参考信号的信号标识或所述第一参考信号的资源标识。The apparatus according to claim 25, wherein the first reference signal information comprises a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  27. 根据权利要求24至26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号与所述第二参考信号具有关联关系,所述关联关系为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或所述第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。The apparatus according to any one of claims 24 to 26, wherein the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is an uplink corresponding to the first reference signal. The downlink beam corresponding to the beam and the second reference signal is a low correlation beam, or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  28. 根据权利要求24至27中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块,还用于接收来自所述网络设备的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。The apparatus according to any one of claims 24 to 27, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive instruction information from the network device, and the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission Mode, the first uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送模块,还用于向所述网络设备发送第一请求信息,所述第一请求信息用于请求进入所述第一上行传输模式;和/或The apparatus according to claim 28, wherein the sending module is further configured to send first request information to the network device, and the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and / or
    所述发送模块,还用于向所述网络设备发送第二请求信息,所述第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。The sending module is further configured to send second request information to the network device, where the second request information is used to request to exit a second uplink transmission mode, and the second uplink transmission mode corresponds to the first reference signal The uplink beam of is the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送模块具体用于:The device according to claim 29, wherein the sending module is specifically configured to:
    向所述网络设备发送上行信令,所述上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且所述上行信令包括所述第二请求信息,所述上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。Send uplink signaling to the network device, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that blocking is detected or terminal rotation is detected, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is uplink control Any of the information UCI, media access control control unit MAC CE, physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  31. 根据权利要求28至30中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送模块,还用于向所述网络设备发送第三请求信息,所述第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;和/或The apparatus according to any one of claims 28 to 30, wherein the sending module is further configured to send third request information to the network device, and the third request information is used to request access to the second An uplink transmission mode, where the second uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; and/or
    所述发送模块,还用于向所述网络设备发送第四请求信息,所述第四请求信息用于请求退出所述第一上行传输模式。The sending module is further configured to send fourth request information to the network device, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  32. 根据权利要求24至31中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送模块,还用于发送能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。The apparatus according to any one of claims 24 to 31, wherein the sending module is further configured to send capability information, and the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first The uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  33. 根据权利要求28至32中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、物理上行控制信道PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或探测参考信号SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。The apparatus according to any one of claims 28 to 32, wherein the first uplink transmission mode comprises a first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, a first uplink transmission mode of a physical uplink control channel PUCCH, or a sounding reference signal At least one of the first uplink transmission modes of the SRS.
  34. 根据权利要求24至33中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述发送模块,还用于采用所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束,与所述网络设备进行上行通信。The apparatus according to any one of claims 24 to 33, wherein the sending module is further configured to use an uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal to perform uplink communication with the network device.
  35. 根据权利要求24至34中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于根据所述第一参考信号的路损,确定上行发送功率;The device according to any one of claims 24 to 34, wherein the device further comprises a processing module configured to determine the uplink transmission power according to the path loss of the first reference signal;
    所述发送模块,用于根据所述上行发送功率,与所述网络设备进行上行通信。The sending module is configured to perform uplink communication with the network device according to the uplink transmission power.
  36. 一种用于上行传输的装置,其特征在于,包括:A device for uplink transmission, characterized in that it comprises:
    发送模块,用于向终端发送多个参考信号;The sending module is used to send multiple reference signals to the terminal;
    接收模块,用于接收来自所述终端的测量报告,所述测量报告用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第一参考信号对应的上行波束,以及用于指示所述多个参考信号中的第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The receiving module is configured to receive a measurement report from the terminal, where the measurement report is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal among the multiple reference signals, and the measurement report is used to indicate the measurement report of the multiple reference signals. Downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述测量报告包括第一参考信号信息和第二参考信号信息,所述第一参考信号信息用于指示所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束,所述第二参考信号信息用于指示所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束。The apparatus according to claim 36, wherein the measurement report includes first reference signal information and second reference signal information, and the first reference signal information is used to indicate the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal , The second reference signal information is used to indicate the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal.
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号信息包括所述第一参考信号的信号标识或所述第一参考信号的资源标识。The apparatus according to claim 37, wherein the first reference signal information comprises a signal identifier of the first reference signal or a resource identifier of the first reference signal.
  39. 根据权利要求36至37中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一参考信号与所述第二参考信号具有关联关系,所述关联关系为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为低相关波束,或所述第一上行参考信号对应的上行波束与所述第二参考信号对应的下行波束为不同天线面板形成的波束。The apparatus according to any one of claims 36 to 37, wherein the first reference signal and the second reference signal have an association relationship, and the association relationship is an uplink corresponding to the first reference signal. The downlink beam corresponding to the beam and the second reference signal is a low correlation beam, or the uplink beam corresponding to the first uplink reference signal and the downlink beam corresponding to the second reference signal are beams formed by different antenna panels.
  40. 根据权利要求36至39中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块,还用于接收来自所述网络设备的指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示终端开启第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。The apparatus according to any one of claims 36 to 39, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive instruction information from the network device, and the instruction information is used to instruct the terminal to start the first uplink transmission Mode, the first uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块,还用于接收来自所述终端的第一请求信息,所述第一请求信息用于请求进入所述第一上行传输模式;和/或The apparatus according to claim 40, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive first request information from the terminal, and the first request information is used to request to enter the first uplink transmission mode; and / or
    所述装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于在接收到所述第一请求信息的情况下,关闭第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式。The device further includes a processing module configured to turn off a second uplink transmission mode when the first request information is received, and the second uplink transmission mode is corresponding to the first reference signal The uplink beam has the same transmission mode as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  42. 根据权利要求40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块,还用于接收接收来自所述终端的第二请求信息,所述第二请求信息用于请求退出第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;The apparatus according to claim 40, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive second request information from the terminal, and the second request information is used to request to exit the second uplink transmission mode, so The second uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal;
    所述装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于在接收到所述第二请求信息的情况下,关闭所述第二上行传输模式。The device further includes a processing module configured to turn off the second uplink transmission mode when the second request information is received.
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块具体用于:The device according to claim 42, wherein the receiving module is specifically configured to:
    接收来自所述终端的上行信令,所述上行信令用于指示检测到遮挡,或检测到终端旋转,且所述上行信令包括所述第二请求信息,所述上行信令为上行控制信息UCI、媒体访问控制控制单元MAC CE、物理上行共享信道PUSCH中的任一项。Receive uplink signaling from the terminal, where the uplink signaling is used to indicate that blocking or rotation of the terminal is detected, and the uplink signaling includes the second request information, and the uplink signaling is uplink control Any of the information UCI, media access control control unit MAC CE, physical uplink shared channel PUSCH.
  44. 根据权利要求40至43中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块,还用于接收来自所述终端的第三请求信息,所述第三请求信息用于请求进入第二上行传输模式,所述第二上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束相同的传输模式;或The device according to any one of claims 40 to 43, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive third request information from the terminal, and the third request information is used to request access to the second An uplink transmission mode, where the second uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is the same as the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal; or
    所述接收模块,还用于接收来自所述终端的第四请求信息,所述第四请求信息用于请求退出所述第一上行传输模式。The receiving module is further configured to receive fourth request information from the terminal, where the fourth request information is used to request to exit the first uplink transmission mode.
  45. 根据权利要求36至44中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述接收模块,还用于接收能力信息,所述能力信息用于指示终端支持第一上行传输模式,所述第一上行传输模式为所述第一参考信号对应的上行波束与预设参考信号对应的上行波束不同的传输模式。The device according to any one of claims 36 to 44, wherein the receiving module is further configured to receive capability information, and the capability information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the first uplink transmission mode, and the first The uplink transmission mode is a transmission mode in which the uplink beam corresponding to the first reference signal is different from the uplink beam corresponding to the preset reference signal.
  46. 根据权利要求40至45中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一上行传输模式包括PUSCH的第一上行传输模式、PUCCH的第一上行传输模式或SRS的第一上行传输模式中的至少一项。The apparatus according to any one of claims 40 to 45, wherein the first uplink transmission mode comprises a first uplink transmission mode of PUSCH, a first uplink transmission mode of PUCCH, or a first uplink transmission mode of SRS At least one of.
  47. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器、存储器和收发器;A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor, a memory, and a transceiver;
    所述收发器,用于接收信号或者发送信号;The transceiver is used to receive signals or send signals;
    所述存储器,用于存储程序代码;The memory is used to store program code;
    所述处理器,用于从所述存储器调用所述程序代码执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call the program code from the memory to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 23.
  48. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,当所述处理器调用存储器中的计算机程序时,如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法被执行。A communication device, comprising: a processor, and when the processor calls a computer program in a memory, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 23 is executed.
  49. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:存储器和处理器;所述存储器用于存储计算机程序,当所述处理器调用所述存储器中的计算机程序时,所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising: a memory and a processor; the memory is used to store a computer program, and when the processor calls the computer program in the memory, the communication device executes claims 1 to The method of any one of 23.
  50. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, wherein the computer-readable storage medium includes a computer program or instruction, and when the computer program or instruction runs on a computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1 to 23. The method described in the item.
  51. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product comprises a computer program or instruction, when the computer program or instruction is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute any one of claims 1 to 23 method.
  52. 一种芯片,其特征在于,处理器和通信接口,所述处理器用于执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized by a processor and a communication interface, the processor being used to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 23.
  53. 一种芯片,包括处理器、存储器和通信接口,所述存储器中存储有计算机程序,所述处理器用于执行所述计算机程序以实现如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。A chip includes a processor, a memory, and a communication interface. The memory stores a computer program, and the processor is configured to execute the computer program to implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 23.
PCT/CN2020/079291 2020-03-13 2020-03-13 Uplink transmission method and apparatus WO2021179305A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/079291 WO2021179305A1 (en) 2020-03-13 2020-03-13 Uplink transmission method and apparatus
CN202080098082.1A CN115211175B (en) 2020-03-13 2020-03-13 Method and device for uplink transmission

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/079291 WO2021179305A1 (en) 2020-03-13 2020-03-13 Uplink transmission method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021179305A1 true WO2021179305A1 (en) 2021-09-16

Family

ID=77670427

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/079291 WO2021179305A1 (en) 2020-03-13 2020-03-13 Uplink transmission method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115211175B (en)
WO (1) WO2021179305A1 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024026670A1 (en) * 2022-08-02 2024-02-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Information processing methods and apparatuses, and communication device and storage medium
WO2024032639A1 (en) * 2022-08-12 2024-02-15 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2024040424A1 (en) * 2022-08-23 2024-02-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Decoupled downlink and uplink beam management

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018124675A1 (en) * 2016-12-26 2018-07-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. User equipment (ue) and method for performing random access for beamforming-based connected mode handover
CN108282878A (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method, equipment and the system of instruction wave beam mark bit wide
CN109548192A (en) * 2017-08-18 2019-03-29 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of processing method and terminal of wave beam failure recovery

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108377559B (en) * 2016-11-04 2021-03-30 华为技术有限公司 Multi-connection communication method based on wave beams, terminal equipment and network equipment
WO2018143702A1 (en) * 2017-02-01 2018-08-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method for beam management in wireless communication systems
US11509364B2 (en) * 2017-03-13 2022-11-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for uplink precoder determination using downlink reference signals or downlink precoder determination using uplink reference signals
CN108633006B (en) * 2017-03-17 2021-03-19 电信科学技术研究院 Method and device for determining uplink transmission beam
CN108092697B (en) * 2017-05-11 2022-11-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Signal transmission method and device
CN110912665B (en) * 2018-09-18 2021-04-20 华为技术有限公司 Data transmission method and device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018124675A1 (en) * 2016-12-26 2018-07-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. User equipment (ue) and method for performing random access for beamforming-based connected mode handover
CN108282878A (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 A kind of method, equipment and the system of instruction wave beam mark bit wide
CN109548192A (en) * 2017-08-18 2019-03-29 维沃移动通信有限公司 A kind of processing method and terminal of wave beam failure recovery

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
APPLE INC: "Remaining Issues on Multi-beam operation", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1910969 REMAINING ISSUES ON MULTI-BEAM OPERATION, vol. RAN WG1, 5 October 2019 (2019-10-05), Chongqing, China, pages 1 - 14, XP051789749 *
ERICSSON: "Feature Lead Summary 4 on Beam Measurement and Reporting", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1803481 FEATURE LEAD SUMMARY 4 ON BEAM MANAGEMENT, vol. RAN WG1, 5 March 2018 (2018-03-05), Athens, Greece, pages 1 - 25, XP051398779 *
INTEL CORPORATION: "Discussion on Beam Management", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1716294 DISCUSSION ON BEAM MANAGEMENT, vol. RAN WG1, 17 September 2017 (2017-09-17), Nagoya, Japan, pages 1 - 8, XP051339750 *
INTERDIGITAL, INC: "Remaining issues on Beam Management", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1800734 BEAM MANAGEMENT_FINAL, vol. RAN WG1, 13 January 2018 (2018-01-13), Vancouver, Canada, pages 1 - 6, XP051385049 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024026670A1 (en) * 2022-08-02 2024-02-08 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Information processing methods and apparatuses, and communication device and storage medium
WO2024032639A1 (en) * 2022-08-12 2024-02-15 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2024040424A1 (en) * 2022-08-23 2024-02-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Decoupled downlink and uplink beam management

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115211175B (en) 2023-10-20
CN115211175A (en) 2022-10-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11546106B2 (en) Method and device for determining beam failure detection reference signal resource
WO2020156174A1 (en) Beam indication method and communication apparatus
US11064492B2 (en) Resource configuration method and apparatus
US10893566B2 (en) Method for receiving beam recovery request and network device
WO2021179305A1 (en) Uplink transmission method and apparatus
WO2020034877A1 (en) Link failure recovery method and related device
US20200120612A1 (en) Power determining method, device, and system
US20220240120A1 (en) Resource Measurement Method and Apparatus
US20210168636A1 (en) Method for assessing radio link quality, parameter configuration method, apparatuses thereof and system
WO2020134984A1 (en) Beam failure recovery method and apparatus
US20230093234A1 (en) Uplink measurement management method, apparatus, and system
WO2021062764A1 (en) Timing advance (ta) processing method and device for terminal
US20210127286A1 (en) Method for wireless communication, terminal, and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium
WO2019238007A1 (en) Method and apparatus for detecting beam
WO2021022894A1 (en) Antenna panel state notification method, device, chip, and storage medium
US20220225337A1 (en) Interference measurement reporting method and communications apparatus
CN111757374B (en) Beam management method and device
WO2023050472A1 (en) Method and apparatus for paging
WO2021032007A1 (en) Link failure report transmission method and device
WO2024032639A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20220353872A1 (en) Electronic device and method for scheduling restriction
WO2020151554A1 (en) Method and apparatus for sending and detecting information
CN114071536A (en) Communication method and device
WO2022083752A1 (en) Array selection method, terminal, network device, and storage medium
WO2021159398A1 (en) Beam failure recovery method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20924788

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20924788

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1